movitrac® ltp-b - Alas-Kuul

movitrac® ltp-b - Alas-Kuul
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
*22872051_0916*
Operating Instructions
Standard Inverters
MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Edition 09/2016
22872051/EN
SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Table of contents
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Table of contents
1
General information.................................................................................................................. 8
1.1
About this documentation ............................................................................................... 8
1.2
Structure of the safety notes ........................................................................................... 8
1.2.1
Meaning of signal words ................................................................................ 8
1.2.2
Structure of section-related safety notes........................................................ 8
1.2.3
Structure of embedded safety notes .............................................................. 8
1.3
Rights to claim under limited warranty ............................................................................ 9
1.4
Content of the documentation......................................................................................... 9
1.5
Exclusion of liability......................................................................................................... 9
1.6
Product names and trademarks...................................................................................... 9
1.7
Copyright notice .............................................................................................................. 9
2
Safety notes ............................................................................................................................ 10
2.1
Preliminary information ................................................................................................. 10
2.2
Operator's duties........................................................................................................... 10
2.3
Target group ................................................................................................................. 10
2.4
Designated use ............................................................................................................. 11
2.4.1
Hoist applications ......................................................................................... 11
2.5
Functional safety technology ........................................................................................ 12
2.6
Transport....................................................................................................................... 12
2.7
Installation/assembly..................................................................................................... 12
2.7.1
Restrictions of use........................................................................................ 13
2.8
Electrical connection ..................................................................................................... 13
2.8.1
Required preventive measure ...................................................................... 13
2.8.2
Stationary application ................................................................................... 13
2.9
Protective separation .................................................................................................... 14
2.10
Startup/operation .......................................................................................................... 14
3
Device structure ..................................................................................................................... 15
3.1
Nameplate..................................................................................................................... 15
3.2
Type designation........................................................................................................... 15
3.3
Device structure of the standard inverter ...................................................................... 16
3.3.1
Inverters with degree of protection IP20/NEMA 1 ........................................ 16
3.3.2
Inverters with degree of protection IP66/NEMA 4X...................................... 17
3.3.3
Inverters with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K.................................... 18
4
Installation............................................................................................................................... 19
4.1
General information ...................................................................................................... 19
4.2
Permitted tightening torques ......................................................................................... 20
4.3
Mechanical installation.................................................................................................. 21
4.3.1
IP20 housing: Installation and installation space ......................................... 21
4.3.2
IP55/IP66 housing: Installation and control cabinet dimensions .................. 22
4.4
Electrical installation ..................................................................................................... 23
4.4.1
Before installation......................................................................................... 23
4.4.2
Line contactors ............................................................................................. 24
4.4.3
Mains fuses .................................................................................................. 25
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
3
Table of contents
5
4
Startup ..................................................................................................................................... 52
5.1
User interface................................................................................................................ 52
5.1.1
Keypads ....................................................................................................... 52
5.1.2
Resetting parameters to default settings...................................................... 54
5.1.3
Key combinations ......................................................................................... 54
5.1.4
Software LT Shell ......................................................................................... 55
5.1.5
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio engineering software ...................................... 57
5.2
Automatic measuring procedure "Auto tune" ............................................................... 59
5.3
Startup for motors ......................................................................................................... 59
5.3.1
Startup for asynchronous motors with V/f control ........................................ 60
5.3.2
Startup for asynchronous motors with VFC speed control........................... 60
5.3.3
Startup for asynchronous motors with VFC torque control .......................... 61
5.3.4
Startup of synchronous motors without encoder feedback (PMVC control).......
62
5.3.5
Startup with LSPM motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE ................................... 63
5.3.6
Startup with preset motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE ................................... 64
5.4
Startup of control........................................................................................................... 65
5.4.1
Terminal mode (factory setting) P1-12 = 0................................................... 65
5.4.2
Keypad mode (P1-12 = 1 or 2)..................................................................... 66
5.4.3
PID controller mode (P1-12 = 3) .................................................................. 66
5.4.4
Master-slave mode (P1-12 = 4).................................................................... 68
5.4.5
Fieldbus mode (P1-12 = 5, 6 or 7) ............................................................... 69
5.4.6
MultiMotion mode (P1-12 = 8)...................................................................... 69
5.5
Hoist function ................................................................................................................ 70
5.5.1
General information...................................................................................... 71
5.5.2
Startup for hoist function .............................................................................. 71
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
4.5
4.4.4
Operation on an IT system........................................................................... 26
4.4.5
Operation on a TN system with an RCD switch (IP20) ................................ 27
4.4.6
Permitted voltage supply systems................................................................ 27
4.4.7
Help card ...................................................................................................... 27
4.4.8
Removing the terminal cover ....................................................................... 28
4.4.9
Cable gland plate ......................................................................................... 30
4.4.10 Connecting and installing the braking resistor ............................................. 31
4.4.11 Motor temperature protection TF, TH, KTY84, PT1000 ............................... 32
4.4.12 Multi-motor drive/group drive ....................................................................... 33
4.4.13 Motor cables and fusing ............................................................................... 33
4.4.14 Connecting AC brakemotors ........................................................................ 33
4.4.15 UL-compliant installation .............................................................................. 34
4.4.16 Information regarding UL ............................................................................. 37
4.4.17 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ........................................................... 38
4.4.18 Overview of signal terminals ........................................................................ 44
4.4.19 Communication socket RJ45 ....................................................................... 47
4.4.20 24 V backup mode ....................................................................................... 48
4.4.21 DC link connection ....................................................................................... 49
Wiring diagram.............................................................................................................. 49
4.5.1
Brake control ................................................................................................ 51
Table of contents
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
22872051/EN – 09/2016
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.5.3
Hoisting mode .............................................................................................. 72
5.5.4
Troubleshooting and optimizing the hoist function ....................................... 73
Fire mode/emergency mode ......................................................................................... 74
Operation at 87 Hz characteristic.................................................................................. 75
Motor potentiometer function – crane application ......................................................... 75
5.8.1
Motor potentiometer operation ..................................................................... 76
5.8.2
Terminal assignment .................................................................................... 77
5.8.3
Parameter settings ....................................................................................... 77
Examples of analog input scaling and offset setting ..................................................... 78
5.9.1
Example 1: Analog input scaling .................................................................. 78
5.9.2
Example 2: Analog input offset .................................................................... 79
5.9.3
Example 3: Analog input scaling and offset ................................................. 80
Fans and pumps ........................................................................................................... 81
Motor potentiometer...................................................................................................... 81
3-wire control ................................................................................................................ 82
5.12.1 Control signal source 3-wire control ............................................................. 82
6
Operation................................................................................................................................. 83
6.1
Inverter status ............................................................................................................... 83
6.1.1
Static inverter status..................................................................................... 83
6.1.2
Operating state of the inverter...................................................................... 84
6.1.3
Status displays of the parameter module..................................................... 85
6.1.4
Fault reset .................................................................................................... 85
6.2
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 86
6.3
Error history .................................................................................................................. 86
6.4
Error codes ................................................................................................................... 87
7
Fieldbus mode ........................................................................................................................ 92
7.1
General information ...................................................................................................... 92
7.1.1
Structure and settings of process data words .............................................. 92
7.1.2
Communication example.............................................................................. 94
7.1.3
Parameter settings for the inverter............................................................... 94
7.1.4
Connecting the signal terminals at the inverter ............................................ 95
7.1.5
Establishing a CANopen/SBus network ....................................................... 95
7.2
Connecting a gateway or controller (SBus MOVILINK®) .............................................. 96
7.2.1
Specification ................................................................................................. 96
7.2.2
Electrical installation..................................................................................... 96
7.2.3
Startup at gateway ....................................................................................... 97
7.2.4
Startup at a CCU .......................................................................................... 98
7.2.5
MOVI‑PLC® motion protocol (P1-12 = 8)...................................................... 98
7.3
Modbus RTU................................................................................................................. 99
7.3.1
Specification ................................................................................................. 99
7.3.2
Electrical installation..................................................................................... 99
7.3.3
Register allocation of the process data words ........................................... 100
7.3.4
Data flow example...................................................................................... 101
7.4
CANopen .................................................................................................................... 103
7.4.1
Specification ............................................................................................... 103
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
5
Table of contents
6
Electrical installation................................................................................... 103
COB IDs and functions in the inverter........................................................ 103
Supported transmission modes.................................................................. 104
Default allocation plan of process data objects (PDO)............................... 104
Data flow example...................................................................................... 105
Table of CANopen-specific objects ............................................................ 106
Table of manufacturer-specific objects ...................................................... 108
Emergency code objects ............................................................................ 108
8
Service ................................................................................................................................... 109
8.1
Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE................................................................. 109
8.2
Extended storage........................................................................................................ 109
8.3
Waste disposal............................................................................................................ 110
9
Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 111
9.1
Overview of parameters.............................................................................................. 111
9.1.1
Parameters for realtime monitoring (read only).......................................... 111
9.1.2
Parameter register ..................................................................................... 116
9.2
Explanation of the parameters .................................................................................... 122
9.2.1
Parameter group 1: Basic parameters (level 1) ......................................... 122
9.2.2
Parameter group 1: Servo-specific parameters (level 1)............................ 130
9.2.3
Parameter group 2: Extended parameter setting (level 2) ......................... 132
9.2.4
Parameter group 3: PID controller (level 2)................................................ 142
9.2.5
Parameter group 4: Motor control (level 2) ................................................ 145
9.2.6
Parameter group 5: Fieldbus communication (level 2)............................... 151
9.2.7
Parameter group 6: Extended parameters (level 3) ................................... 155
9.2.8
Parameter group 7: Motor control parameters (level 3) ............................. 161
9.2.9
Parameter group 8: Application-specific parameters (only LTX) (level 3).. 164
9.2.10 Parameter group 9: Digital inputs defined by the user (level 3) ................. 166
10
Technical data....................................................................................................................... 173
10.1
Markings ..................................................................................................................... 173
10.2
Ambient conditions...................................................................................................... 174
10.3
Technical data............................................................................................................. 175
10.3.1 1-phase system AC 200 – 240 V ............................................................... 175
10.3.2 3-phase system AC 200 – 240 V ............................................................... 176
10.3.3 3-phase system AC 380 – 480 V ............................................................... 180
10.3.4 3-phase system AC 500 – 600 V ............................................................... 184
10.4
Input voltage ranges ................................................................................................... 187
10.5
Overload capacity ....................................................................................................... 187
10.6
Housing variants and dimensions ............................................................................... 188
10.6.1 Housing variants ........................................................................................ 188
10.6.2 Dimensions ................................................................................................ 189
10.6.3 Dimensions ................................................................................................ 190
10.7
Protection function ...................................................................................................... 192
11
Functional safety (STO) ....................................................................................................... 193
11.1
Integrated safety technology....................................................................................... 193
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
Table of contents
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
12
11.1.1 Safe condition ............................................................................................ 193
11.1.2 Safety concept ........................................................................................... 193
11.1.3 Restrictions ................................................................................................ 196
Safety conditions......................................................................................................... 197
11.2.1 Storage requirements................................................................................. 197
11.2.2 Installation requirements ............................................................................ 197
11.2.3 Requirements on the external safety controller.......................................... 199
11.2.4 Requirements for safety relays .................................................................. 200
11.2.5 Requirements on startup ............................................................................ 200
11.2.6 Requirements on operation........................................................................ 200
Connection variants .................................................................................................... 202
11.3.1 General information.................................................................................... 202
11.3.2 Disconnection of a single drive .................................................................. 203
Safety characteristics.................................................................................................. 206
Signal terminal block for STO safety contact .............................................................. 206
Declaration of conformity .................................................................................................... 207
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 208
Address list ........................................................................................................................... 214
22872051/EN – 09/2016
13
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
7
1
General information
About this documentation
1
General information
1.1
About this documentation
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is written for
all employees who assemble, install, start up, and service this product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons responsible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the product
independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further information, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
1.2
Structure of the safety notes
1.2.1
Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word
Meaning
Consequences if disregarded
DANGER
Imminent hazard
Severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING
Possible dangerous situation
Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION
Possible dangerous situation
Minor injuries
NOTICE
Possible damage to property
Damage to the drive system or its
environment.
INFORMATION
Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the drive system.
1.2.2
Structure of section-related safety notes
Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
•
Structure of embedded safety notes
Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the description of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard. Possible consequence(s) if disregarded. Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
8
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1.2.3
Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
General information
Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3
1
Rights to claim under limited warranty
Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the product.
1.4
Content of the documentation
The current version of the operating instructions is the original.
This document contains additional safety-relevant information and conditions for use
in safety-related applications.
1.5
Exclusion of liability
Read the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve the
specified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting
from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,
SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.
1.6
Product names and trademarks
The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective titleholders.
1.7
Copyright notice
22872051/EN – 09/2016
© 2016 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved. Unauthorized reproduction, modification, distribution or any other use of the whole or any part of this documentation is
strictly prohibited.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
9
2
Safety notes
Preliminary information
2
Safety notes
2.1
Preliminary information
The following general safety notes have the purpose to avoid injury and damage to
property. They primarily apply to the use of products described in this documentation.
If you use additional components also observe the relevant warning and safety notes.
2.2
Operator's duties
Make sure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons
responsible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the
device independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood
it. If you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation, or if you require further information, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The operator must ensure that the following works are only performed by qualified personnel:
•
Transport
•
Storage
•
Setup and assembly
•
Installation and connection
•
Startup
•
Maintenance and repair
•
Shutdown
•
Disassembly
•
Waste disposal
Make sure persons working on the product adhere to the following regulations, requirements, documents and information:
•
National and regional safety and accident prevention regulations
•
Warning and safety signs on the product
•
All other relevant project planning documents, installation and startup instructions,
wiring diagrams and schematics
•
Do not assemble, install or operate damaged products
•
All specific specifications and requirements for the system
2.3
Target group
Specialist for
mechanical work
10
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the
design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and maintenance of the product, who
possess the following qualifications:
•
Qualification in the field of mechanics according to applicable national regulation.
•
They are familiar with this documentation
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Make sure that systems with the product installed are equipped with additional monitoring and protection devices. Observe the applicable safety regulations and legislation governing technical equipment and accident prevention regulations.
Safety notes
Designated use
Specialist for electrotechnical work
2
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately skilled persons (electrically). Qualified electricians in the context of this documentation are persons familiar
with electrical installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who
possess the following qualifications:
•
Qualification in the field of electrical engineering according to applicable national
regulation.
•
They are familiar with this documentation
In addition to that, these persons must be familiar with the valid safety regulations and
laws, as well as with the requirements of the standards, directives and laws specified
in this documentation. The above mentioned persons must have the authorization expressly issued by the company to operate, program, configure, label and ground
devices, systems and circuits in accordance with the standards of safety technology.
Instructed persons
2.4
All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately. The purpose of the instruction is
that the persons are capable of performing the required tasks and work steps in a safe
and correct manner.
Designated use
The product is intended for installation in electrical plants or machines.
In case of installation in electrical systems or machines, startup of the product is prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in the
local laws and directives. For Europe, Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC as well as the
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU apply. Observe EN 60204-1 (Safety of machinery - electrical equipment of machines). The product meets the requirements stipulated in the
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
The standards given in the declaration of conformity apply to the product.
The systems can be mobile or stationary. The motors must be suitable for operation
with inverters. Do not connect any other loads to the product. Never connect capacitive loads to the product.
The product can be used to operate the following motors in industrial and commercial
systems:
•
AC asynchronous motors with squirrel-cage rotor
•
Permanent-field AC synchronous motors
Technical data and information on the connection conditions are provided on the
nameplate and in chapter "Technical data" in the documentation. Always comply with
the data and conditions.
Unintended or improper use of the product may result in severe injury to persons and
damage to property.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
2.4.1
Hoist applications
To avoid danger of fatal injury by falling hoists, observe the following points when using the product in lifting applications:
•
Use mechanical protection devices.
•
Perform a hoist startup.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
11
2
Safety notes
Functional safety technology
2.5
Functional safety technology
The product must not perform any safety functions without a higher-level safety system, unless explicitly allowed by the documentation.
2.6
Transport
Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the shipping company immediately about any damage. If the product is damaged, it must not
be assembled, installed or started up.
Observe the following notes when transporting the device:
•
Ensure that the product is not subject to mechanical impact during transportation.
•
Before transportation, cover the connections with the supplied protection caps.
•
Only place the product on the cooling fins or on the side without connectors during
transportation.
•
Always use lifting eyes if available.
If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently dimensioned handling equipment.
Observe the information on climatic conditions in chapter "Technical data" of the documentation.
2.7
Installation/assembly
Ensure that the product is installed and cooled according to the regulations in the documentation.
Protect the product from excessive mechanical strain. The product and its mounted
components must not protrude into the path of persons or vehicles. Ensure that components are not deformed and that insulation spaces are maintained, particularly during transportation. Electric components must not be mechanically damaged or destroyed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Observe the notes in the chapter "Mechanical installation" of the documentation.
12
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Safety notes
Electrical connection
2.7.1
2
Restrictions of use
The following applications are prohibited unless explicitly permitted:
•
Use in potentially explosive areas
•
Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, and radiation
•
Operation in applications with impermissibly high mechanical vibration and shock
loads in excess of the regulations stipulated in EN 61800-5-1
•
Operation at installation altitudes above 4000 m above sea level
The product can be used at altitudes above 1000 m asl up to 4000 m asl under the following conditions:
2.8
•
Taking the reduced continuous rated current into consideration, see chapter
"Technical data" of the documentation.
•
Above 2000 m asl, the air and creeping distances are only sufficient for overvoltage class II according to EN 60664. If the installation requires overvoltage category III according to EN 60664 you have to reduce the overvoltages on the system side from category III to II using additional external overvoltage protection.
•
If a protective electrical separation is required, then implement this outside the
product at altitudes of more than 2000 m above sea level (protective separation in
accordance with EN 61800‑5‑1 and EN 60204‑1)
Electrical connection
Make yourself familiar with the applicable national accident prevention guidelines before you work on the product.
Perform electrical installation according to the pertinent regulations (e.g. cable cross
sections, fusing, protective conductor connection). The documentation at hand contains additional information.
Make sure that all required covers are installed correctly after electrical installation.
Make sure that preventive measures and protection devices comply with the applicable regulations (e.g. EN 60204-1 or EN 61800-5-1).
2.8.1
Required preventive measure
Make sure that the product is correctly attached to the ground connection.
2.8.2
Stationary application
Necessary preventive measure for the product is:
Type of energy transfer
Preventive measure
Direct power supply
•
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Ground connection
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
13
2
Safety notes
Protective separation
2.9
Protective separation
The product meets all requirements for protective separation of power and electronics
connections in accordance with EN 61800-5-1. To ensure protective separation, all
connected circuits must also meet the requirements for protective separation.
2.10
Startup/operation
Observe the safety notes in the chapters "Startup" and "Operation" in the documentation.
Make sure that the present transport protection is removed.
Do not deactivate monitoring and protection devices of the machine or system even
for a test run.
Make sure the connection boxes are closed and screwed before connecting the supply voltage.
Depending on the degree of protection, products may have live, uninsulated, and
sometimes moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces during operation.
Additional preventive measures may be required for applications with increased hazard potential. You have to check the protection devices after each modification.
When in doubt, switch off the product whenever changes occur in relation to normal
operation. Possible changes are e.g. increased temperatures, noise, or oscillation. Determine the cause. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary.
When the device is switched on, dangerous voltages are present at all power connections as well as at any connected cables and terminals. This also applies even when
the product is inhibited and the motor is at standstill.
Do not separate the connection to the product during operation.
This may result in dangerous electric arcs damaging the product.
If you disconnect the product from the voltage supply, do not touch any live components or power connections because capacitors might still be charged. Observe the following minimum switch-off time:
10 minutes.
Observe the corresponding information signs on the product.
The fact that the operation LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated
does not indicate that the product has been disconnected from the supply system and
no longer carries any voltage.
Risk of burns: The surface temperature of the product can exceed 60 °C during operation.
Do not touch the product during operation.
Let the product cool down before touching it.
14
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Mechanical blocking or internal safety functions of the product can cause a motor
standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in the
drive re-starting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the drivecontrolled machine, first disconnect the product from the supply system and then start
troubleshooting.
Device structure
Nameplate
3
Device structure
3.1
Nameplate
3
The following figure shows an example of a nameplate.
18014412064772491
3.2
Type designation
Example: MCLTP-B 0015-2B1-4-00 (60 Hz)
Product name
Version
Recommended motor
power
Connection voltage
MCLTP MOVITRAC® LTP-B
B
0015
2
Version status of the device series
0015 = 1.5 kW
2 = 200 – 240 V
5 = 380 – 480 V
6 = 500 – 600 V
Interference suppression
on the input
B
0 = Class 0
A = Class C2
B = Class C1
Connection type
1
1 = 1-phase
3 = 3-phase
Quadrants
4
4 = 4-quadrant operation
Design
00
00 = Standard IP20 housing
10 = IP66/NEMA-4X housing
22872051/EN – 09/2016
10 = IP55/NEMA-12K housing
Country-specific variant
(60 Hz) 60 Hz design
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
15
3
Device structure
Device structure of the standard inverter
3.3
Device structure of the standard inverter
3.3.1
Inverters with degree of protection IP20/NEMA 1
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 5.5 kW
400 V
0.75 – 11 kW
575 V
0.75 – 15 kW
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
[1]
®
MOVITRAC LTP-B
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
+
BR
U
V
W
17957766667
Connecting terminal strip PE, -DC, L1/L, L2/N, L3
[2]
Auxiliary card with terminal assignment and basic parameters
[3]
Keypad with a 6-digit 7-segment display
[4]
Control terminal strip (pluggable)
[5]
RJ45 communication socket
[6]
Option card slot
[7]
Connecting terminal strip PE, +, BR, U, V, W
[8]
Relay terminal strip (pluggable)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
16
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Device structure
Device structure of the standard inverter
3.3.2
3
Inverters with degree of protection IP66/NEMA 4X
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 4 kW
400 V
0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V
0.75 – 11 kW
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5]
17957961099
Full text display/6-digit 7-segment display
[2]
Keypad
[3]
Control terminal strip (pluggable)
[4]
Relay terminal strip (pluggable)
[5]
Connecting terminal strip PE, L1/L, L2/N, L3, -DC, +, BR, U, V, W
[6]
RJ45 communication socket
[7]
Option card slot
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
17
3
Device structure
Device structure of the standard inverter
3.3.3
Inverters with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
5.5 – 75 kW
400 V
11 – 160 kW
575 V
15 – 110 kW
L1
L2
L3
+DC BR -DC
U
V
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[6]
W
L1
L2
L3
+DC BR -DC
U
V
W
[7]
[7]
17957963531
Full text display/6-digit 7-segment display
[2]
Keypad
[3]
Control terminal strip (pluggable)
[4]
Option card slot
[5]
Relay terminal strip (pluggable)
[6]
RJ45 communication socket
[7]
Connecting terminal strip PE, L1/L, L2/N, L3, -DC, +, BR, U, V, W
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
18
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
General information
4
Installation
4.1
General information
•
Carefully check the inverter for damage before the installation.
•
Store the inverter in its original packaging until it is used. The storage location
must be clean and dry with an ambient temperature between ‑40 °C and +60 °C.
•
Install the inverter in a suitable housing on a level, vertical, non-flammable, and vibration-free surface. If a certain IP degree of protection is required, observe
EN 60529.
•
Keep flammable materials away from the inverter.
•
Prevent the ingress of conductive or flammable foreign objects.
•
The relative humidity must be kept below 95% (condensation is not permitted).
•
Protect the IP55/IP66 inverter from direct sunlight. Use a cover when using the inverter outdoors.
•
Inverters can be installed next to each other. Ensure sufficient ventilation space
between the individual devices. If the inverter is to be installed above another inverter or another device that dissipates heat, then there must be a vertical minimum clearance of 150 mm. To enable self-cooling, the control cabinet must either
be cooled through forced ventilation, or dimensioned accordingly. See chapter
"IP20 housing: Installation and installation space" (→ 2 21).
•
The permitted ambient
conditions" (→ 2 174).
•
The mounting rail installation is only possible for the following inverters with degree
of protection IP20.
temperatures
are
defined
in
chapter
4
"Ambient
– 230 V: 0.75 – 2.2 kW
– 400 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
– 575 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
The mounting rail must have the dimensions 35 × 15 mm or 35 × 7.5 mm and be
designed according to EN 50022.
•
Install the frequency inverter only as depicted in the following figure:
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
U
V
W
®
BR
MOVITRAC LTP-B
+
®
MOVITRAC LTP-B
BR
U
V
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
+
®
MOVITRAC LTP-B
W
22872051/EN – 09/2016
BR
U
V
W
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
+
7312622987
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
19
4
Installation
Permitted tightening torques
4.2
Permitted tightening torques
Tightening torque in Nm for inverter
Power of the inverter
Control terminals
Power terminals
Nominal line voltage 230 V
0.75 – 2.2 kW
1
3 – 5.5 kW (IP20)
1 (IP20)
3 – 4 kW (IP66)
1 (IP66)
5.5 kW (IP66)
7.5 – 11 kW
4 (IP66)
0.8
4
15 – 18.5 kW
15
22 – 45 kW
20
55 – 75 kW
20
Nominal line voltage 400 V
0.75 – 4 kW
1
5.5 – 11 kW (IP20)
1 (IP20)
5.5 – 7.5 kW (IP66)
1 (IP66)
11 kW (IP66)
15 – 22 kW
4 (IP66)
0.8
4
30 – 37 kW
15
45 – 90 kW
20
110 – 160 kW
20
Nominal line voltage 575 V
0.75 – 5.5 kW
1
7.5 – 15 kW (IP20)
1 (IP20)
7.5 – 11 kW (IP66)
1 (IP66)
15 kW (IP66)
0.8
4 (IP66)
4
37 – 45 kW
15
55 – 110 kW
20
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18.5 – 30 kW
20
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Mechanical installation
4.3
Mechanical installation
4.3.1
IP20 housing: Installation and installation space
4
Inverters with degree of protection IP20 must be installed in a control cabinet. Observe
the following requirements:
•
The control cabinet must be made of a heat conductive material unless it has
forced cooling.
•
When using a control cabinet with ventilation openings, the openings must be
provided above and underneath the inverter to allow for unobstructed circulation of
air. The air must be supplied underneath the inverter and dissipated above it.
•
If the inverter is operated in environments with particles of dirt (such as dust), ventilation openings either have to be equipped with a suitable particle filter or forced
cooling has to be used. The filter has to be serviced and cleaned.
•
In environments with a high level of humidity, salt or chemicals, a suitable enclosed control cabinet (without ventilation openings) must be used.
•
The inverters with degree of protection IP20 can be installed right next to each
other without clearance.
A
®
MOVITRAC LTP-B
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
+
BR
U
V
W
A
17958518795
Power of the inverter
A in mm
Air flow rate per inverter
230 V: 0.75 kW, 1.5 kW
60
> 45 m3/h
230 V: 2.2 kW
100
> 45 m3/h
All other power ranges
100
> 80 m3/h
400 V: 0.75 kW, 1.5 kW, 2.2 kW
22872051/EN – 09/2016
575 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
21
4
Installation
Mechanical installation
4.3.2
IP55/IP66 housing: Installation and control cabinet dimensions
Inverters with degree of protection IP55/IP66 can be used indoors.
In control cabinets or in field, the following minimum distances must not be underrun.
A
B
A
B
B
A
9007208910888971
Power of the inverter
A in mm
B in mm
0.75 – 4 kW
100
10
5.5 – 75 kW
200
10
0.75 – 7.5 kW
100
10
11 – 160 kW
200
10
0.75 – 11 kW
100
10
15 – 110 kW
200
10
230 V
400 V
575 V
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
If the IP55/IP66 inverter is installed in a control cabinet, a sufficient control cabinet
ventilation must be ensured.
22
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4
4
Electrical installation
WARNING
Electric shock due to charged capacitors. Dangerous voltage levels may still be
present inside the device and at the terminals up to 10 minutes after disconnection
from the power supply.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Wait 10 minutes after you have de-energized the inverter and have switched off
the line voltage and the DC 24 V voltage. Do not start working on the device until
you have made sure that it is de-energized.
WARNING
Danger of fatal injury due to falling hoist.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
22872051/EN – 09/2016
4.4.1
The inverter is not designed for use as a safety device in lifting applications. Use
monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure safety.
•
The inverters may only be installed by electrical specialists in compliance with the
applicable directives and regulations.
•
The grounding cable must be designed for the maximum fault current of the
voltage source that is usually limited by fuses or motor protection switches.
•
The inverter has the degree of protection IP20. For a higher IP degree of protection, a suitable enclosure or the IP55/NEMA 12K or the IP66/NEMA 4X variant has
to be used.
•
Make sure the devices are properly grounded. Adhere to the wiring diagram in
chapter "Connecting the inverter and motor" (→ 2 49).
Before installation
•
Make sure that supply voltage, frequency, and number of phases (single- or threephase) correspond with the nominal values of the inverter on delivery.
•
A disconnecting switch or similar disconnecting element must be installed between
voltage supply and inverter.
•
Never connect the power supply to the output terminals U, V or W of the inverter.
•
Do not install contactors between inverter and motor. Adhere to a minimum clearance of 100 mm at points where control cables and electric power lines are installed close to each other, and an angle of 90° for crossing cables.
•
The cables are only protected by slow-blow high-power fuses or motor circuit
breaker. You find more information in section "Permitted voltage supply
systems" (→ 2 27).
•
It is recommended that you use a 4-core PVC-insulated and shielded cable as the
power cable. Route this cable according to the applicable national regulations of
the industry sector as well as the rules and standards. Conductor end sleeves are
required for connecting the power cables to the inverter.
•
Make sure that shieldings and sheaths of power cables are designed according to
the wiring diagram in section "Connecting inverter and motor" (→ 2 49).
•
The grounding terminal of each inverter must be connected individually and directly to the ground busbar (mass) of the installation site (via filter, if available).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
23
4
Installation
Electrical installation
•
Do not loop the ground connections of the inverter from one inverter to the other.
Neither route the ground connections to the inverters from other inverters.
•
The impedance of the ground circuit must comply with the local safety regulations
of the industry sector.
•
Make sure that all terminals are tightened with the respective tightening torques,
see chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 173).
•
To comply with UL regulations, all earth connections must be designed with UL listed crimping cable lugs.
Unlike direct operation in the supply system, inverters on the motor generate suitable
fast-switching output voltages (PWM). In the case of motors wound for operation with
adjustable-speed drives, no further preventive actions are necessary. If, however, the
insulation quality is unknown, contact the manufacturer of the motor because preventive actions may be necessary.
INFORMATION
Make sure that the earth connections are properly connected. The inverter can generate leakage currents > 3.5 mA. The grounding cable must be sufficiently dimensioned to carry the maximum fault current of the voltage source that is usually limited
by fuses or miniature circuit breakers. Sufficiently rated fuses or miniature circuit
breakers must be integrated into the inverter's mains supply in accordance with local
laws and/or regulations.
4.4.2
Line contactors
Use only line contactors in utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1).
Make sure to wait at least 30 seconds between 2 switching cycles.
UN
$ 30 s
t
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18442995979
24
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.3
4
Mains fuses
Fuse types:
•
Line protection types in operation classes gL, gG:
– Rated fusing voltage ≥ rated line voltage
– The nominal fusing current must be designed for at least 100% of the inverter
nominal input current depending on the inverter utilization.
•
Power circuit breaker with characteristic B:
– Nominal circuit breaker voltage ≥ nominal line voltage
– The nominal currents of the power circuit breakers must be 10% higher than
the nominal inverter current.
Residual current device
WARNING
No protection against electric shock if an incorrect type of residual current device is
used.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Use only universal current sensitive residual current devices of type B for inverters.
Inverters generate a DC current component in the leakage current and can significantly reduce the sensitivity of an residual current device of type A. A type A residual current device is this not permitted as protection device.
•
If the use of a residual current device is not mandatory according to the standards,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends not to use a residual current device.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
25
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.4
Operation on an IT system
IP20 devices can be operated on the IT system as described below. Please contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE for all other devices.
For operation on the IT system, the connection of the overvoltage protection and the
EMC filter to PE has to be separated. Screw out the EMC and VAR screw on the side
of the device.
WARNING
Danger of electric shock. Dangerous voltage levels may still be present inside the inverter and at the terminals up to 10 minutes after disconnection from the power supply.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Disconnect the inverter from the power supply at least 10 minutes before you
screw out the EMC and VAR screw.
[1] [2]
3034074379
[1] EMC screw
[2] VAR screw
L/L1
N/L2
L3
Internal
EMC
Filter
EMC
Internal
Surge
Protection
VAR
Earth
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using earth-leakage monitors with pulse code measurement in voltage supply systems with a non-grounded star point (IT systems). Use
of such devices prevents the insulation monitor mis-tripping due to the earth capacitance of the inverter.
26
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
9007204745593611
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.5
4
Operation on a TN system with an RCD switch (IP20)
IP20 inverters with integrated EMC filter (such as MOVITRAC® LT xxxx xAx-x-00 or
MOVITRAC® LT xxxx xBx-x-00) have a higher leakage current than devices without
EMC filter. The EMC filter may cause errors when operated with a RCCB. Deactivate
the EMC filter to reduce the leakage current. To do so, screw out the EMC and VAR
screw on the side of the device. See figure in chapter "Operation on an IT
system" (→ 2 26).
4.4.6
Permitted voltage supply systems
•
Voltage supply systems with grounded star point
Inverters with all degrees of protection are intended for operation on TN and TT
systems with directly grounded star point.
•
Voltage supply systems with non-grounded star point
Operation on voltage supply systems with non-grounded star point (for example IT
systems) is only permitted for inverters with degree of protection IP20. See chapter
"Operation on an IT system" (→ 2 26).
•
Voltage systems with grounded outer conductor
On voltage supply systems, the inverters with all degrees of protection may only
be operated with a maximum phase-to-ground AC voltage of 300 V.
4.4.7
Help card
The help card contains an overview of the terminal assignment and additionally an
overview of the basic parameters of parameter group 1.
In the IP55/IP66 housing, the help card is attached behind the removable front cover.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
In the IP20 housing, the help card is inserted in a slot above the display.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
27
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.8
Removing the terminal cover
To access the terminals of inverters with degree of protection IP55/IP66, remove the
front cover of the frequency inverter. Only use cross-head or slot screwdrivers to open
the terminal cover.
The connection terminals can be accessed when the screws on the front of the
product are removed as shown below.
The front cover is attached by proceeding in reverse order.
Inverters with degree of protection IP66/NEMA 4X
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 4 kW
400 V
0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V
0.75 – 11 kW
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18157858827
28
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4
Inverters with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
5.5 – 75 kW
400 V
11 – 160 kW
575 V
15 – 110 kW
[2]
[3]
[4]
MOVITRAC®LTP B
MOVITRAC®LTP B
MOVITRAC®LTP B
MOVITRAC®LTP B
[1]
9007212609488907
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
[2]
•
230 V: 5.5 – 11 kW
•
[3]
•
230 V: 22 – 45 kW
400 V: 11 – 22 kW
•
400 V: 45 – 90 kW
•
575 V: 15 – 30 kW
•
575 V: 55 – 110 kW
•
230 V: 15 – 18.5 kW
•
230 V: 55 – 75 kW
•
400 V: 30 – 37 kW
•
400 V: 110 – 160 kW
•
575 V: 37 – 45 kW
[4]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
29
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.9
Cable gland plate
A suitable cable gland system is required to maintain the respective IP/NEMA degree
of protection. Cable entry holes have to be drilled that correspond to this system.
NOTICE
Drilling cable entry holes may lead to particles entering the inverter.
Possible damage to property.
•
Be careful when drilling the hole to prevent particles from entering the inverter.
→ Remove all particles at and in the inverter.
Some guide sizes are listed below:
Recommended hole sizes and hole types for the cable gland.
Power of the inverter
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
Hole size
Imperial
Metrical
25 mm
PG16
M25
Hole size
Commercial size
Metrical
35 mm
1 in
M25
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
Hole sizes for flexible electrical installation ducts
Power of the inverter
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
An IP degree of protection is only ensured when the cables are installed with a bushing or sleeve for a flexible electrical installation duct approved by UL.
When installing electrical installation ducts, the insertion holes of the duct must have
standard openings for the required sizes according to NEC specifications.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Not intended for rigid electrical installation ducts.
30
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.10
4
Connecting and installing the braking resistor
WARNING
Danger of electric shock. The supply cables to the braking resistors carry a high
voltage (approx. DC 900 V) during rated operation.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Before removing the supply cable, disconnect the inverter from the power supply
and wait at least 10 minutes.
CAUTION
Risk of burns. The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking
resistors are loaded with PN.
Minor injuries.
•
Choose a suitable installation location.
•
Do not touch the braking resistors.
•
Install a suitable touch guard.
The braking resistor is connected between the inverter terminals "BR" and "+". In case
of a new device, these terminals have a cover installed that can be broken out. Break
out the cover prior to first use.
•
Shorten the cables to the required length.
•
Use 2 tightly twisted leads or a 2-core shielded power cable. The cable cross section has to be dimensioned according to the tripping current IF of F16, the nominal
voltage according to DIN VDE 0298.
•
Protect the braking resistor with a bimetallic relay and set the tripping current IF of
the respective braking resistor.
•
The flat-type braking resistors have internal thermal overload protection (fuse cannot be replaced). Install the flatpack resistors using appropriate touch guards.
•
For braking resistors in the BW..-...T series, you can connect the integrated temperature sensor using a 2-core, shielded cable as an alternative to a bimetallic relay.
U
V
W
+
BR
F16
22872051/EN – 09/2016
BW...
affects
K11
9007202440373003
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
31
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.11
Motor temperature protection TF, TH, KTY84, PT1000
Motors with internal temperature sensor (TF, TH, KTY84, PT1000 or similar) can be
directly connected to the inverter.
If the thermal protection is triggered, the inverter displays the error "F-PTC".
For motor protection monitoring, the following types can be selected:
•
PTC-th for thermal sensor TF or bimetallic switch TH with trigger threshold 2.5 kΩ
•
KTY84 in temperature classes B (120 °C), F (155 °C) and H (180 °C)
•
PT1000 in temperature classes B (120 °C), F (155 °C) and H (180 °C)
When parameter P2-33 is configured for motor protection, this setting automatically
overwrites the function selection of the digital inputs (P1-15) to analog input AI2 = motor protection.
INFORMATION
Configure the temperature sensor on the inverter using P2-33, before the temperature sensor is connected. Then, connect the temperature sensor according to the wiring diagram. Incorrect connection may lead to damage of sensor or inverter.
For information regarding the parameter P2-33, refer to chapter "P2-33 Analog input 2
format / motor protection" (→ 2 140).
17409280907
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
STO–
3
STO+
2
AI 2 / DI 5
1
17409278475
P2-33 = KTY84 or PT1000 (B, F, H)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P2-33 = PTC-th
0V
0V
9 10 11 12 13
AO 1 / DO 1
AO 1 / DO 1
8
0V
0V
7
AI 1 / DI 4
AI 1 / DI 4
6
+10 V
+10 V
5
DI 3
DI 3
4
STO–
DI 2
3
STO+
DI 1
2
AI 2 / DI 5
+24 VIO
1
DI 2
PT1000
DI 1
Bimetallic switch TH
+24 VIO
KTY84
AO 2 / DO 2
Thermal sensor TF
AO 2 / DO 2
Connection example for various temperature sensors:
32
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.12
4
Multi-motor drive/group drive
The total of the motor currents must not exceed the nominal current of the inverter.
The maximum permitted cable length for the group is limited to the values of single
connection. See chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 173).
The motor group is limited to five motors and must not differ by more than 3 frame
sizes.
Multi-motor operation is only possible with AC asynchronous motors, not with synchronous motors.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use an output choke "HD LT xxx", additionally unshielded cables, and a maximum permitted output frequency of 4 kHz for groups of
more than 3 motors.
4.4.13
Motor cables and fusing
Comply with the regulations issued by specific countries and for specific machines regarding fusing and the selection of supply system leads and motor cables.
Determine the permitted length of all motor cables connected in parallel as follows:
Itot ≤
Imax
n
3172400139
Itot
= Total length of the motor cables connected in parallel
Imax
= Recommended maximum motor cable length
n
= Number of motors connected in parallel
No additional fusing is required if the cross section of the motor cable corresponds to
the cross section of the supply system lead. If the cross section of the motor cable is
smaller than the cross section of the supply system lead, you must protect the motor
cable against a short circuit for the corresponding cross section. Motor protection
switches are suited to this purpose.
4.4.14
Connecting AC brakemotors
For detailed information about the SEW‑EURODRIVE brake system, refer to the "AC
Motors" catalog, which you can order from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
SEW‑EURODRIVE brake systems are disk brakes with a DC coil that release electrically and brake using spring force. A brake rectifier supplies the brake with DC voltage.
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The brake rectifier must have a separate supply system cable for inverter operation.
Supply via the motor voltage is not permitted.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
33
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.15
UL-compliant installation
Note the following information for UL-compliant installation:
Ambient temperatures
The inverters can be operated at the following ambient temperatures:
Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
IP20/NEMA 1
-10 °C to 50 °C
IP55/NEMA 12K
-10 °C to 40 °C
IP66/NEMA 4X
Use only copper connection cables suited for ambient temperatures up to 75 °C.
Tightening torques for the power and control terminals
Refer to chapter "Permitted tightening torques" (→ 2 20) for the permitted tightening
torques for the inverters.
External DC 24 V supply
Use only certified devices with a limited output voltage (Umax = DC 30 V) and limited
output current (I ≤ 8 A) as an external DC 24 V voltage source.
Voltage supply systems and fusing
The inverters are suitable for operation in voltage supply systems with earthed star
point (TN and TT systems) that can supply a maximum line current and a maximum
line voltage in accordance with the following table. The fuses listed in the following
tables are the maximum permitted fuses for each inverter. Only use melting fuses.
UL certification does not apply to operation in voltage supply systems with a nongrounded star point (IT systems).
1 × 200 – 240 V devices
Fuse or MCB (type B)
Max. supply short circuit
current
Max. line voltage
0008
15 A
100 kA rms (AC)
240 V
0015
20 A
0022
25 A
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1 × 200 − 240 V
34
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4
3 × 200 – 240 V devices
3 × 200 − 240 V
Fuse or MCB (type B)
Max. supply short circuit
current
Max. line voltage
0008
10 A
100 kA rms (AC)
240 V
0015
15 A
0022
17.5 A
0030
30 A
0040
30 A
0055
40 A
0075
50 A
0110
70 A
Fuse or MCB (type B)
Max. supply short circuit
current
Max. line voltage
0008
6 A
100 kA rms (AC)
480 V
0015
10 A
0022
10 A
0040
15 A
0055
25 A
0075
30 A
0110
40 A
0150
50 A
0185
60 A
0220
70 A
0150
90 A
0185
110 A
0220
150 A
0300
175 A
0370
225 A
0450
250 A
0550
300 A
0750
350 A
3 × 380 – 480 V devices
3 × 380 − 480 V
80 A
0370
100 A
0450
125 A
0550
150 A
0750
200 A
0900
250 A
1100
300 A
1320
350 A
1600
400 A
22872051/EN – 09/2016
0300
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
35
4
Installation
Electrical installation
3 × 500 – 600 V devices
3 × 500 − 600 V
Fuse or MCB (type B)
Max. supply short circuit
current
Max. line voltage
0008
6 A
100 kA rms (AC)
600V
0015
6 A
0022
10 A
0040
10 A
0055
15 A
0075
20 A
0110
30 A
0150
35 A
0185
45 A
0220
60 A
0300
70 A
0370
80 A
0450
100 A
0550
125 A
0750
150 A
0900
175 A
1100
200 A
Thermal motor protection
The inverter is provided with thermal motor overload protection according to NEC (National Electrical Code, US).
Thermal motor overload protection shall be provided by one of the following means:
NEC compliant installation of a motor temperature sensor, see also chapter "Motor
temperature protection (TF/TH)" (→ 2 32).
•
Using internal thermal motor overload protection by activating parameter P4-17.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
36
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.16
4
Information regarding UL
INFORMATION
Due to UL requirements, the following chapters are always printed in English independent of the language of the revision:
Thermal motor protection
Thermal motor overload protection shall be provided by one of the following means:
•
NEC compliant installation of a motor temperature sensor, see also section "Motor
temperature protection (TF/TH)" in the chapter "Electrical Installation" of the operating instructions.
•
Using internal thermal motor overload protection according to NEC (National Electrical Code, US). Thermal motor overload protection can be activated via parameter P4-17.
•
Implementing external measures to ensure thermal motor overload protection
according to NEC (National Electrical Code).
Parameter
The following additional parameter was added to MOVITRAC® LTP-B/LTX inverters to
implement internal thermal motor protection according to NEC:
•
P4-17 Thermal motor protection according to NEC
– 0: disabled
– 1: enabled
Functional principle
The motor current is accumulated in an internal memory over the course of time. The
inverter goes to fault state as soon as the thermal limit is exceeded (I.t-trP).
Once the output current of the inverter is less than the set rated motor current, the internal memory is decremented depending on the output current.
When P4-17 is disabled, thermal memory retention is reset upon shutdown or
power loss.
•
When P4-17 is enabled, thermal memory retention is maintained upon shutdown
or power loss.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
37
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.17
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Inverters with EMC filters are designed for use in machines and drive systems. They
meet the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 for drives with variable speed. Observe
the specifications of Directive 2014/30/EU for EMC‑compliant installation of the drive
system.
Interference immunity
With regard to interference immunity, the frequency inverter with an EMC filter meets
the limit values defined in the standard EN 61800-3 and can therefore be used for
both industrial and domestic (light industrial) applications.
Interference emission
With regard to interference emission, the inverter meets the EMC limit values of the
standard EN 61800-3:2004. The inverters are suitable for industrial as well as household applications (light industry).
Install the inverters as specified in chapter Installation to ensure best possible electromagnetic compatibility. Ensure proper ground connections for the inverters. Use shielded motor cables to comply with the specifications on interference emission.
The conditions for use in drive applications are defined in the table below.
Inverter type
Cat. C1 (class B)
Cat. C2 (class A)
Cat. C3
in accordance with EN 61800-3
230 V, 1-phase
No additional filtering required.
LTP-B xxxx 2B1-x-xx
Use a shielded motor cable.
230 V, 3-phase
Use an external filter
of the type NF LTxxx
xxx.
LTP-B xxxx 2A3-x-xx
400 V, 3-phase
LTP-B xxxx 5A3-x-xx
575 V, 3-phase
LTP‑B xxxx 603-x-xx
No additional filtering required.
Use a shielded motor cable.
Use a shielded motor
cable.
If necessary, you can use a line filter of the type
NF LT xxx to minimize the electromagnetic interference
emission. However, compliance with the limit classes
cannot be guaranteed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Use a shielded motor cable.
38
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4
General information about connecting the motor shield
We strongly recommend that you use the shield plate with LTX applications.
Connect the shield by the shortest possible route and make sure it is earthed over a
wide area at both ends. This also applies to cables with several shielded core strands.
9007200661451659
Recommendation for motor shield connection at frequency inverters with IP20
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 5.5 kW
400 V
0.75 – 11 kW
575 V
0.75 – 15 kW
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Inverters with degree of protection
IP20/NEMA 1
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
39
4
Installation
Electrical installation
Example LTP-B inverter
Example LTP-B inverter with LTX module
[5]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[7]
9007212157809419
Motor cable
Additional PE connection
[5]
[6]
[3]
Encoder cable
[7]
[4]
Communication cable RJ45
Control cables
• 230 V: 0.75 – 2.2 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
• 230 V: 3 – 5.5 kW
• 400 V: 5.5 – 11 kW
• 575 V: 7.5 – 15 kW
The shield plate can be used optionally for the inverters in IP20 design listed above.
Proceed as follows to adjust:
1. Loosen the 4 screws on the slotted holes.
2. Move the plate up to the stop according to the required size.
3. Tighten the screws again.
Make sure that the plate is correctly attached to the PE connection.
40
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
[2]
Installation
Electrical installation
4
Recommendation for motor shield connection at frequency inverters with IP55/IP66
The use of metal screw fittings is recommended to connect the motor shield to the
device. For the inverters listed below, the threads must be at least 8 mm.
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 4 kW
400 V
0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V
0.75 – 11 kW
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Inverters with degree of protection
IP66/NEMA 4X
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
41
4
Installation
Electrical installation
≥8 mm
[1]
[3]
[2]
LTP-B
LTP-B + LTX
[4]
[6]
[5]
9007212157811595
Metal counter nut
Metal cable gland
Enclosed rubber gasket
[4]
[5]
[6]
LTX module
Motor cable
Supply system cable
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
[2]
[3]
42
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4
Recommendation for routing the encoder, control and communication cables
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
9007212386365579
[1]
[2]
[3]
Inverters with degree of protection
IP55/NEMA 12K
Encoder cable, if LTX module
Signal terminal/communication
Motor cable
[4]
[5]
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
5.5 – 18.5 kW
400 V
11 – 37 kW
575 V
15 – 45 kW
L1
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Signal terminal/communication
Supply system cable
[1]
L2
L3
+DC BR -DC
U
V
W
[2]
[3]
18242097931
[1] Supply system cable
[2] Metal cable gland
[3] Motor cable
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
43
4
Installation
Electrical installation
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
22 – 75 kW
400 V
45 – 160 kW
575 V
55 – 110 kW
L1
L2
L3
+
+
BR
-
U
V
W
BR
[2]
[3]
[1]
18243537675
[1] Supply system cable
[2] Metal cable gland
[3] Motor cable
4.4.18
Overview of signal terminals
Main terminals
NOTICE
Applying voltages of more than 30 V to the signal terminals can damage the controller.
Possible damage to property.
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
0V
AO 1 / DO 1
0V
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
44
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
45035999276880139
STO–
DI 3
2
STO+
DI 2
1
AI 2 / DI 5
DI 1
AO 2 / DO 2
The voltage applied to the signal terminals must not exceed 30 V.
+24 VIO
•
Installation
Electrical installation
4
The signal terminal block is equipped with the following connections:
Terminal
no.
1
Signal
Connection
Description
+24 VIO
+24 V: Reference voltage/ Reference voltage for controlling the digital inputs
backup voltage
(max. 100 mA)1)
Adhere to the "Note for connecting the STO
function" (→ 2 46).
2
DI 1
Digital input 1
Positive logic
3
DI 2
Digital input 2
"Logic 1" input voltage range: DC 8 – 30 V
4
DI 3
Digital input 3
"Logic 0" input voltage range: DC 0 – 2 V
Compatible with PLC requirement if 0 V is connected
to terminal 7 or 9.
5
6
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
Output +10 V: Reference
voltage
10 V: Reference voltage for analog input
Analog input 1 (12 bit)
analog: 0 – 10 V, 10 – 0 V, -10 – 10 V, 0 – 20 mA, 4 –
20 mA, 20 – 4 mA
Digital input 4
(Potential supply +, 10 mA max., 1 – 10 kΩ)
digital: "Logic 1" input voltage range:
DC 8 – 30 V
7
0 V
0 V: Reference potential
Adhere to the "Note for connecting the STO
function" (→ 2 46).
8
AO 1 / DO 1
Analog output 1 (10 bit)
analog: 0 – 10 V, 10 – 0 V, 0 – 20 mA, 20 – 0 mA,
Digital output 1
4 – 20 mA, 20 – 4 mA
digital: 0 / 24 V maximum output current: 20 mA
9
0 V
0 V: Reference potential
Adhere to the "Note for connecting the STO
function" (→ 2 46).
10
AI 2 / DO 5
Analog input 2 (12 bit)
analog: 0 – 10 V, 10 – 0 V, PTC-th, 0 – 20 mA,
Digital input 5 / thermistor 4 – 20 mA, 20 – 4 mA, KTY84, PT1000
contact
digital: "Logic 1" input voltage range:
DC 8 – 30 V
11
AO 2 / DO 2
Analog output 2 (10 bit)
analog: 0 – 10 V, 10 – 0 V, 0 – 20 mA, 20 – 0 mA,
Binary output 2
4 – 20 mA, 20 – 4 mA
digital: 0 / 24 V maximum output current: 20 mA
12
STO+
Output stage enable
DC +24 V input, max. 100 mA current consumption
22872051/EN – 09/2016
STO safety contact, high = DC 18 – 30 V
Adhere to the "Note for connecting the STO
function" (→ 2 46).
13
STO-
GND reference potential for DC +24 V input
STO safety contact
Adhere to the "Note for connecting the STO
function" (→ 2 46).
1) With inverter operation with fieldbus option, terminal 1 can be used to supply the backup voltage.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
45
4
Installation
Electrical installation
All digital inputs are enabled with an input voltage in the range of 8 – 30 V. This
means they are +24 V compatible.
The response time of the digital and analog inputs is less than 4 ms. The resolution of
the analog inputs is 12 Bit at an accuracy of ±2% in reference to the set maximum
scaling.
Note for connecting the STO function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STO–
STO+
0V
0V
DI 1
If terminal 12 is permanently supplied with 24 V, and terminal 13 is permanently connected to GND, then the "STO" function is permanently disabled.
9 10 11 12 13
[1]
–
+
[2]
18481633291
External DC 24 V supply
[2]
Optional safety relay
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
46
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Electrical installation
4
Relay terminals
14
15
16
17
18
NOTICE
Possible damage to property
Do not connect any inductive loads to the relay contact.
Terminal
no.
Signal
Relay function selection
14
Relay output 1 reference
15
Relay output 1 NO contact
16
Relay output 1 NC contact
17
Relay output 2 reference
18
Relay output 2 NO contact
4.4.19
P2-15
Description
Relay contact (AC 250 V / DC 30 V,
max. 5 A)
P2-18
Communication socket RJ45
Socket at device
1
8
9007212770640779
SBus-/CAN busSBus+/CAN bus+
0 V
RS485- (engineering)
RS485+ (engineering)
+24 V (output voltage/backup voltage)
RS485- (Modbus RTU)
RS485+ (Modbus RTU)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
47
4
Installation
Electrical installation
4.4.20
24 V backup mode
The inverter allows for realizing a backup mode via external 24 V. This means the
control electronics and the option cards such as the fieldbus cards are fully functional
even when the power supply is switched off.
Requirements
Firmware version 1.20 (can be seen in P0-28).
Range of functions
•
Parameter access (reading only, no writing)
•
Fieldbus communication
Setting up 24 V backup mode
All inverters that are connected to each other in a communication network and use the
24 V backup mode have to be supplied simultaneously with external 24 V. Make sure
that individual devices that are connected in the network are not separated from 24 V.
INFORMATION
Errors in the fieldbus network may occur if the inverters are not supplied by the power
supply and individual devices that are in the RJ45 network or the optional fieldbus
network are separated from the 24 V supply. Make sure that all connected inverters
are always supplied with external 24 V at the same time.
Example of a wiring diagram
Supply
24 V
Supply
Supply
Supply
+24 VIO
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
0V
AO 1 / DC
0V
AI 2 / DI 5
AO 2 / DC
STO+
STO-
+24 VIO
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
0V
AO 1 / DC
0V
AI 2 / DI 5
AO 2 / DC
STO+
STO-
+24 VIO
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
0V
AO 1 / DC
0V
AI 2 / DI 5
AO 2 / DC
STO+
STO-
0 V/GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13
Relay
14 151617 18
Option
RJ45
Relay
14 151617 18
Option
RJ45
Relay
14 151617 18
Option
Communication
via RJ45 or
optional
fieldbus card
18364546315
48
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
RJ45
Installation
Wiring diagram
4.4.21
4
DC link connection
The DC link is routed on terminals for all power ratings. It is thus possible to couple all
devices with a DC link connection or to directly supply them with DC voltage.
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in such a case.
4.5
Wiring diagram
WARNING
Danger of electric shock. Incorrect wiring can lead to dangerously high voltages.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Adhere to the following.
In the following applications, always cut-off the brake in the AC and DC circuits:
•
All lifting applications.
•
Applications that require a quick brake reaction time.
Please note the following:
•
The following inverters with degree of protection IP66/NEMA 4X already have
openings for supply system, motor and control cables.
– 230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
– 400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
– 575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
The following inverters with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K are equipped
with a metal entry board. The user has the possibility to drill the cable entries according to his requirements.
– 230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
– 400 V: 11 – 160 kW
– 575 V: 15 – 110 kW
•
Connect the brake rectifier using a separate supply system lead.
•
Supply via the motor voltage is not permitted.
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
In case of a new device, the terminal slots DC-, + (DC+) and BR have a cover installed that can be broken out if required.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
49
4
Installation
Wiring diagram
L1
L2/N
L3 not single-phase 230 V
PE
F11/F12/F13
[1]
K10
(AC-3)
L1
L2
L3
Option ND.. input choke
L1 ' L 2'
L3 '
DC bus “–” access
L1
L2
L3
Power section
U
V
BR
W
+
B W .. / BW..-T
braking resistor
connection*
DC bus “+” access
[2]
M
3-phase
BW
18380767883
Line contactor between supply system and inverter.
[2]
Brake
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
50
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Installation
Wiring diagram
4.5.1
4
Brake control
V DC (BMV)
V AC (BMK)
V AC
F14/F15
V AC
F14/F15
F14/F15
[1]
K11
(A C-3)
V+
K11
(A C-3)
(A
K11
C-3)
17
[3]
V+
V+
18
[3]
17
[3]
17
18
18
GND
K12
(A C-3)
K12
(AC-3)
[2]
[2]
GND
1
BG 2
3
BG E
4
5
DR/DT/DV:
Cut-off in the DC
and AC circuits
GND
white
red
bue
1
BM K 2
3
BM V 4
13
14
15
red
white
blue
white
1
BG 2
3
BG E
4
5
red
blue
DR/DT/DV:
Cut-off in the AC circuit
18475023883
Power supply of the brake rectifier, switched simultaneously via K10.
[2]
Control contactor/control relay, is powered by the internal relay contact [3] of
the inverter and supplies the brake rectifier.
[3]
Isolated relay contact of the inverter.
V+
External voltage supply AC 250 V / DC 30 V at max. 5 A
VDC
(BMV) DC voltage supply BMV.
VAC
(BMK) AC voltage supply BMK.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
51
5
Startup
User interface
5
Startup
5.1
User interface
5.1.1
Keypads
The inverters in IP20 design are equipped with a standard keypad.
The inverters in IP55/IP66 design are equipped with a full text display with language
switching function.
Both keypads allow for operation and setup of the inverter without additional devices.
Standard keypad
MOVITRAC ® LT
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
9007202188405387
[1]
6-digit 7-segment display
[4]
Navigate button
[2]
Start button
[5]
Up button
[3]
Stop/Reset button
[6]
Down button
Keypad with full text display
[1]
[3]
MOVITRAC ® LT
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
18364520203
Full text display (multilingual)
[4]
Navigate button
[2]
Start button
[5]
Up button
[3]
Stop/Reset button
[6]
Down button
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
52
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
User interface
5
Operation
Both keypads have 5 keys with the following functions:
Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
Start [2]
Stop [3]
Navigate [4]
Up [5]
Down [6]
•
Enable drive
•
Changing the direction of rotation
•
Stop drive
•
Acknowledge error
•
Switch menu
•
Save parameter values
•
Display real time information
•
Increase speed
•
Increase parameter values
•
Decrease speed
•
Decrease parameter values
The parameter edit menu can only be accessed by pressing the <Navigate> key [4].
•
To switch between the menu for changing parameters and real-time display (operating speed/operating current): keep the key pressed for longer than 1 second.
•
Switch between operating speed and operating current of the running inverter:
press the key briefly (< 1 second).
The operating speed is only displayed if a nominal motor speed has been entered in
P1-10. Otherwise, the electrical rotating field speed is displayed.
Switching the language at the keypad with full text display
To switch the language in the full text display, press the <Start> key and the <Upwards arrow> key simultaneously. The inverter must not be enabled during this operation.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The list of available languages is now displayed.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
53
5
Startup
User interface
5.1.2
Resetting parameters to default settings
To reset the parameters to the factory setting, proceed as follows:
1. The inverter must not be enabled and the display must show "Inhibit".
2. Press the 3 keys
,
, and
simultaneously for at least 2 s.
"P-deF" appears on the display.
3. Press the
key to acknowledge the "P-deF" message.
INFORMATION
If the inverter is set to the factory settings, the <Start> and <Stop> keys of the keypad
are disabled. To enable using the <Start>/<Stop> keys on the keypad, set the parameter P-12 to "1" or "2".
5.1.3
Key combinations
Function
The device
displays:
Quick parameter Px-xx
group selection1)
Press:
Result
<Navigate> + <Up> keys
The next higher para- "P1-10" is displayed:
meter group is selected. • Press the <Navigate> + <Up> keys.
• Now, "P2-01" is displayed.
+
Px-xx
<Navigate> + <Down> keys
+
Selection of the Px-xx
lowest group
parameter
<Up> + <Down> keys
Set the paraNumerical
meter to the low- value (when
est value
changing a
parameter
value)
<Up> + <Down> keys
Changing indi- Numerical
vidual digits of a value (when
parameter value changing a
parameter
value)
<Stop/reset> + <Navigate>
keys
+
+
Example
The next lower para"P2-26" is displayed:
meter group is selected. • Press the <Navigate> + <Down> keys.
• "P1-01" is now displayed.
The first parameter of a "P1-10" is displayed:
group is selected.
• Press the <Up> + <Down> keys.
• "P1-01" is now displayed.
The parameter is set to When changing P1-01:
the lowest value.
• "50.0" is displayed.
• Press the <Up> + <Down> keys.
• "0.0" is now displayed.
The individual parameter digits can be
modified.
+
When changing P1-10:
• "0" is displayed.
• Press the <Stop/reset> + <Navigate> keys.
• "_0" is now displayed.
• Press the <Up> key.
• "10" is now displayed.
• Press the <Stop/reset> + <Navigate> keys.
• "_10" is now displayed.
• Press the <Up> key.
• "110" is now displayed.
etc.
Select language
<Start> and <Up>
The desired language
can be selected now.
+
1) Parameter group access must be activated: Set P1-14 to "101" or "201".
54
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
• English
• German
• French
• Spanish
• .....
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Switching languages
Startup
User interface
5.1.4
5
Software LT Shell
The LT Shell software enables an easy and quick startup of the inverters. It is available for download on the SEW‑EURODRIVE website. After the installation, perform
software updates on a regular basis.
In combination with the engineering package (cable set C) and the USB11A interface
adapter, the inverter can be connected to the software.
Maximum 63 inverters can be connected to an LT Shell in a network.
The software can be used to carry out the following tasks:
•
Observe, upload and download parameters.
•
Save parameter settings.
•
Firmware update (manual and automatic).
•
Export inverter parameters to Microsoft® Word.
•
Monitor the state of the inputs and outputs and the motor.
•
Control inverter/manual mode.
•
Scope.
Connection to LT Shell
The connection is performed via an RS485 interface (USB11A + PC engineering
package) or via Bluetooth® (parameter module).
RS485
LTP-B
®LT
MOVITRAC
L1/L L2/N L3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18
+
[2]
BR
U
V
W
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
SEW
9288836235
RJ45 to RJ45 cable
[7]
Cable USB A-B
[5]
RJ10 to RJ10 cable
[8]
RJ adapter (2 x RJ45, 1 x RJ10)
[6]
USB11A
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[2]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
55
5
Startup
User interface
Bluetooth®
LTP-B
®LT
MOVITRAC
L1/L L2/N L3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18
+
BR
U
V
W
[1]
9007216440559755
Parameter module
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
56
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
User interface
5.1.5
5
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio engineering software
The software can be connected to the inverter as follows:
•
Via an SBus-connection between PC and inverter. A CAN dongle is required. A
prefabricated cable is not available and must be manufactured according to the
RJ45 assignment and the inverter interface.
•
Via a connection of the PC with a gateway or a MOVI‑PLC®. The connection
between PC and gateway/MOVI‑PLC® is possible via USB11A, USB or Ethernet.
The following functions are available in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio:
•
Observe, upload and download parameter
•
Save parameter settings
•
Monitor the state of the inputs/outputs and the motor.
Connection to MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio
The connection can be set up indirectly via SEW‑EURODRIVE gateway or
SEW‑EURODRIVE controller.
Gateway
LTP-B
L1/L L2/N L3
®LT
MOVITRAC
DFP 21B
RUN
BUS
FAULT
0
1
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
nc
X30
ADDRESS
[1]
[2]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18
[3]
+
SEW
BR
U
V
W
[6]
[4]
[5]
17186235147
Cable USB A-B
[4]
RJ45 cable with open end
[2]
USB11A
[5]
Terminating connector (120 Ω)
[3]
RJ10 to RJ10 cable
[6]
Cable splitter
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
57
5
Startup
User interface
Controller
LTP-B
L1/L L2/N L3
X33
X32
[8]
®LT
MOVITRAC
X31
DHP 11B
X30
[7]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SEW
[3]
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
X34
[1]
[2]
ON
14 15 16 17 18
+
BR
U
V
W
[6]
[4]
[5]
17186293003
Cable USB A-B
[5]
Terminating connector (120 Ω)
[2]
USB11A
[6]
Cable splitter
[3]
RJ10 to RJ10 cable
[7]
Cable USB A-B
[4]
RJ45 cable with open end
[8]
RJ45 Ethernet cable
22872051/EN – 09/2016
[1]
58
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Auto tune
5
Auto tune
5.2
Automatic measuring procedure "Auto tune"
With the automatic measuring procedure, the inverter can measure almost any motor
to determine the motor data.
•
After a reset to the factory settings, the measuring procedure starts automatically
after the first enable and takes up to 2 minutes depending on the control type. Do
not interrupt the measuring procedure.
•
You can also start the automatic measuring procedure "Auto tune" manually with
the parameter P4-02 after entering the motor data. Only enable the inverter after
you have entered all motor data correctly in the parameters.
•
For STO, the terminals 12 and 13 have to be supplied with voltage. Enable is not
required. "Stop" has to be displayed.
INFORMATION
Perform an automatic measuring procedure "Auto tune" after the initial startup or after
changing the control mode in P4-01 when the motor is cold. You can also start autotuning manually via the parameter P4-02 at any time.
5.3
Startup for motors
WARNING
When parameter P4-02 is set to "1" (auto tune) the motor may start up automatically.
Severe or fatal injuries.
•
Make sure that no persons are within the reach of moving parts of the system.
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The ramp times in parameters P1-03 and P1-04 refer to 50 Hz. If P1-16 is set to "InSyn", overload capacity is set to "150%" depending on P1-08.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
59
5
Startup
Startup for motors
5.3.1
Startup for asynchronous motors with V/f control
1. Connect the motor to the inverter. During the connection, adhere to the nominal
motor voltage.
2. Enter the motor data indicated on the motor nameplate:
•
P1-07 = nominal voltage of the motor
•
P1-08 = rated current of the motor
•
P1-09 = rated frequency of the motor
•
P1-10 = rated speed of the motor
- Value = 0: Slip compensation deactivated
- Value ≠ 0: Slip compensation activated
3. Set the maximum and minimum speed using P1-01 and P1-02.
4. Set the acceleration and deceleration ramps using P1-03 and P1-04.
5. Start the automatic motor measurement procedure "Auto Tune" as described in
chapter "Auto Tune" (→ 2 59).
5.3.2
Startup for asynchronous motors with VFC speed control
1. Connect the motor to the inverter. During the connection, adhere to the nominal
motor voltage.
2. Enter the motor data indicated on the motor nameplate:
•
P1-07 = nominal voltage of the motor
•
P1-08 = rated current of the motor
•
P1-09 = rated frequency of the motor
•
P1-10 = rated speed of the motor
•
P1-14 = 201 (Extended parameter menu)
•
P4-01 = 0 (VFC speed control)
•
P4-05 = power factor.
3. Set the maximum and minimum speed using P1-01 and P1-02.
4. Set the acceleration and deceleration ramps using P1-03 and P1-04.
5. Start the automatic motor measurement procedure "Auto Tune" as described in
chapter "Auto Tune" (→ 2 59).
22872051/EN – 09/2016
6. In case of insufficient control performance, the control behavior can be optimized
via the parameter P7-10.
60
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Startup for motors
5.3.3
5
Startup for asynchronous motors with VFC torque control
1. Connect the motor to the inverter. During the connection, adhere to the nominal
motor voltage.
2. Enter the motor data indicated on the motor nameplate:
•
P1-07 = nominal voltage of the motor
•
P1-08 = rated current of the motor
•
P1-09 = rated frequency of the motor
•
P1-10 = rated speed of the motor
•
P1-14 = 201 (Extended parameter menu)
•
P4-01 = 1 (VFC torque control)
•
P4-05 = power factor.
3. Set the maximum and minimum speed using P1-01 and P1-02.
4. Set the acceleration and deceleration ramps using P1-03 and P1-04.
5. Start the automatic motor measurement procedure "Auto Tune" as described in
chapter "Auto Tune" (→ 2 59).
6. In case of insufficient control performance, the control behavior can be optimized
via the parameter P7-10.
Example: The following example shows analog input 2 as torque reference source,
analog input 1 sets the speed:
•
P1-15
= 3 (input terminal assignment)
•
P4-06
= 2 (Torque reference via analog input 2)
•
P6-17
= 0 (Switching off the torque timeout threshold)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
= >0 (Adjusting the timeout time for the maximum torque limit)
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
61
5
Startup
Startup for motors
5.3.4
Startup of synchronous motors without encoder feedback (PMVC control)
The synchronous motors are permanent magnet motors.
INFORMATION
The operation of synchronous motors without encoder must be checked in a test application. Stable operation in this operating mode cannot be ensured for all application cases. Using this operating mode is thus in the sole responsibility of the user.
1. Connect the motor to the inverter. During the connection, adhere to the nominal
motor voltage.
2. Enter the motor data indicated on the motor nameplate:
•
P1-07 = For synchronous motors, not the system voltage is set, but the internal
voltage for nominal motor speed.
•
P1-08 = rated current of the motor
•
P1-09 = rated frequency of the motor
•
P1-10 = rated speed of the motor
•
P1-14 = 201 (Extended parameter menu)
•
P4-01 = 3 (PMVC speed control)
•
P2-24 = PWM frequency (at least 8−16 kHz).
3. Set the maximum and minimum speed using P1-01 and P1-02.
4. Set the acceleration and deceleration ramps using P1-03 and P1-04.
5. Start the automatic motor measurement procedure "Auto Tune" as described in
chapter "Auto Tune" (→ 2 59).
6. In case of insufficient control performance, the control behavior can be optimized
via the parameter P7-10.
In case of unexpected motor control problems, check or set the following:
•
To achieve a higher torque in the lower speed range, the parameters P7-14 and
P7-15 must be increased. Note that the motor may heat up significantly due to the
increased current flow.
•
Sometimes it may be required to align the rotor of motors with higher inertia before
the start. The premagnetization time P7-12 as well as the field strength during the
premagnetization time can be slightly adjusted up or down in P7-14.
In rare cases, it can be helpful to compare the parameters determined in the automatic
motor measurement procedure to the parameters of the motor data. Correct them if
necessary. Note that the values may deviate in case of long motor cables.
62
•
P7-01 = stator resistance of the motor (Rphase-phase or 2 × R1 (20 °C))
•
P7-02 = 0 (Rotor resistance of the motor)
•
P7-03 = Stator inductance (Lsd)
•
P7-06 = Stator inductance (Lsq).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
No repeated measuring procedure is required:
Startup
Startup for motors
5.3.5
5
Startup with LSPM motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE
DR..J type motors are motors with LSPM technology (Line Start Permanent Magnet
motors).
1. Connect the motor to the inverter. During the connection, adhere to the nominal
motor voltage.
2. Enter the motor data indicated on the motor nameplate:
•
P1-07 = internal voltage at nominal motor speed
•
P1-08 = rated current of the motor
•
P1-09 = rated frequency of the motor
•
P1-10 = rated speed of the motor
•
P1-14 = 201 (Extended parameter menu)
•
P4-01 = 6 (LSPM speed control).
3. Set the maximum speed P1-01 and minimum speed P1-02 to 300 1/min.
4. Set the acceleration and deceleration ramps using P1-03 and P1-04.
5. Start the automatic motor measurement procedure "Auto Tune" as described in
chapter "Auto Tune" (→ 2 59).
6. Adjust the boost parameters. A default setting is:
•
P7-14 = 10%
•
P7-15 = 10%.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
7. In case of insufficient control performance, the control behavior can be optimized
via the parameter P7-10.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
63
5
Startup
Startup for motors
5.3.6
Startup with preset motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE
Startup can be performed if one of the following CMP.. motors (speed class 4500 1/
min) or MGF..-DSM motors (speed class 2000 1/min) are connected to the inverter:
Motor type
Display
CMP40M
40M
CMP50S / CMP50M /CMP50L
50S / 50M / 50L
CMP63S / CMP63M / CMP63L
63S / 63M / 63L
CMP71S / CMP71M / CMP71L
71S / 71M / 71L
MGF..2-DSM
gf-2
MGF..4-DSM
gf-4
MGF..4/XT-DSM
gf-4Ht
Procedure
•
Set P1-14 to "1" for access to LTX-specific parameters.
•
Set P1-16 to the preset motor; see chapter "LTX-specific parameters (level 1)" in
the "MOVITRAC® LTX" addendum to the operating instructions.
Example
Example:
CMP.. size
Motor system voltage
Brakemotors
50S
4
b
40M, 50S, 50M, 50L, 63S, 63M, 63L, 71S, 71M, 71L
•
2 = 230 V
•
4 = 400 V
b = flashes for brakemotors
All the required parameters (voltage, current, etc.) are set automatically.
INFORMATION
"Auto Tune" is not necessary for preset motors.
If a CMP.. motor with electronic nameplate is connected to the inverter, P1-16 is selected automatically.
If a MGF..-DSM is selected, the upper torque limit in P4-07 is automatically set to
200%. This value has to be adapted according to the documentation "Addendum to
the Operating Instructions, Drive Unit MGF..-DSM on LTP-B Inverter".
•
64
Refer to chapter "Parameter group 1: Servo-specific parameters (level
1)" (→ 2 130) for a detailed list.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
All necessary motor data are set automatically. For motor protection, the KTY temperature sensor has to be connected to terminal 5 (+10 V) and terminal 10 (analog input 2) and activated via parameter P2-33. Refer to the chapter "Motor temperature
protection TF, TH, KTY84, PT1000" (→ 2 32).
Startup
Startup of control
5.4
5
Startup of control
WARNING
Installing sensors or switches at the terminals may cause an enable signal. The motor may start up automatically.
Severe or fatal injuries.
5.4.1
•
Make sure that no persons are within the reach of moving parts of the system.
•
Install the switches in open state.
•
If you install a potentiometer, set it to 0 first.
Terminal mode (factory setting) P1-12 = 0
For operation in terminal mode (factory setting):
P1-12 must be set to "0" (factory setting).
•
Change the input terminal configuration according to your demands in P1-15.
Refer to chapter P1-15 Digital inputs function selection for the possible settings.
•
Connect a switch between terminals 1 and 2 on the user terminal block.
•
Connect a potentiometer (1 k – 10 k) between terminals 5, 6 and 7. The center tap
is connected to terminal 6.
•
Connect the terminals 12 and 13 of the STO input according to chapter
"Disconnection of a single drive" (→ 2 203).
•
Enable the inverter by establishing a connection between terminals 1 and 2.
•
Set the speed using the potentiometer.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
65
5
Startup
Startup of control
5.4.2
Keypad mode (P1-12 = 1 or 2)
For operation in keypad mode:
•
Set P1-12 to "1" (uni-directional) or "2" (bi-directional).
•
Connect a jumper or switch between terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block to enable the inverter.
•
Connect the terminals 12 and 13 of the STO input according to chapter
"Disconnection of a single drive" (→ 2 203).
•
Press the <Start> key. The inverter is enabled with 0.0 Hz.
•
To increase the speed, press the <Up> key. To decrease the speed, press the
<Down> key.
•
To stop the inverter, press the <Stop/reset> key.
•
To resume to the original speed, press the "Start" key again. If bi-directional mode
is enabled (P1-12 = 2), the direction is reversed by pressing the <Start> key again.
INFORMATION
You can preset the required target speed by pressing the <Stop/reset> key at standstill. Pressing the <Start> key then moves the drive along the preset ramp until it has
reached the required speed.
5.4.3
PID controller mode (P1-12 = 3)
The implemented PID controller can be used for temperature control, pressure control
or other applications.
The following figure shows the configuration options for the PID controller.
PID controller activation
with P1-12 = 3
Fixed setpoint reference
0
PID
reference selection
P3-05
PID
operating mode
P3-04
PID controller upper limit
Fixed setpoint of P3-07: (P3-09=0)
Analog input 1: (P3-09=1)
PID correcting variable + analog input 1: (P3-09=3)
PID
error threshold
P3-11
Analog input 1
1
Analog input 2
0
PIDref.
P0-08
+
-
P gain time P3-01
I time constant P3-02
D time constant P3-03
1
2
0%
PID
setpoint
P0-10
Speed controller
setpoint
P0-04
>0%
-1
Fieldbus PID reference
3
PID
feedback
P0-09
Analog input 2
Acceleration ramp
P1-03
Deceleration ramp
P1-04
PID controller lower limit
Fixed setpoint of P3-08:
(P3-09=0)
Analog input 1: (P3-09=2)
0
Analog input 1
Display
rXXX
x
1
Selection PID
feedback P3-10
Scaling factor
P3-12
Display values
Activation delay
P2-27 <>0
Minimum speed/
frequency
P1-02
&
Parameters
S
Standby mode active
PID wake-up level
P3-13 >
control deviation
R
Parameter selection
27021600768510347
66
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Legend
Standby function
Startup
Startup of control
General information on the use
5
Connect the sensor for the controlled variable to analog input 1 or 2 depending on
P3-10. You can scale the sensor value using parameter P3-12 in such a way that the
value is indicated on the inverter display with the proper quantity, for example 0 –
10 bar.
You can set the target reference for the PID controller using P3-05.
The setting of the speed ramp times has no effect when the PID controller is active.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps can be activated depending on the control deviation (target value – actual value) using P3-11.
Fixed setpoint
reference
Fieldbus PID reference
The fixed setpoint reference entered in P3-06 is used with the setting P3-05 = 0.
When the parameters P9-34 and P9-35 have another value than "OFF", 3 additional
fixed setpoint references P3-14 to P3-16 are activated and are selected according to
the table below:
Terminal selection via
P9-34
Terminal selection via
P9-35
Fixed setpoint reference
0 (LOW)
0 (LOW)
P3-06
1 (HIGH)
0 (LOW)
P3-14
0 (LOW)
1 (HIGH)
P3-15
1 (HIGH)
1 (HIGH)
P3-16
The following parameters must be set in the inverter:
P1-12
= 5 (e.g. control signal source SBus)
P1-14
= 201 (extended parameter menu)
P1-15
= 0 (free function selection of the digital inputs)
P3-05
= 3 (PID reference via the fieldbus)
P5-09 – 11 = 4 (selection of the process output data word for the PID reference)
= Selection of the digital input for enabling the inverter
P9-10
= PID (speed source of the inverter)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P9-01
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
67
5
Startup
Startup of control
5.4.4
Master-slave mode (P1-12 = 4)
Master
Slave 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
®LT
MOVITRAC
L1/L L2/N L3
®LT
MOVITRAC
L1/L L2/N L3
®LT
MOVITRAC
L1/L L2/N L3
Slave 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
IOIOI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
IOIOI
IOIOI
14 15 16 17 18
+
BR
U
V
14 15 16 17 18
+
W
BR
U
V
14 15 16 17 18
+
W
[2]
BR
U
V
W
[2]
[1]
[1]
max 63x
9007212609546891
[1]
[2]
RJ45 to RJ45 cable
Cable splitter
The inverter has an integrated master-slave function.
The master-slave communication is obtained via a special protocol. In this case, the
inverter communicates via the RS485 engineering interface. Up to 63 inverters can be
connected with one another in a communication network using RJ45 connectors.
One inverter is configured as master, the remaining inverters as slaves. Each network
may have only one master inverter. This master inverter sends its operating state
(such as stopped, running) and output frequency every 30 ms. The slave inverters
then follow the state of the master frequency inverter.
Configuring the master inverter
The master inverter of each network must have the communication address "1". Set:
P1-12 ≠ 4 (control signal source)
•
P1-14 = 201 (extended parameter menu)
•
P5-01 = 1 (inverter address communication)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
68
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Startup of control
5
Configuring the slave inverters
•
Each connected slave must have a unique slave communication address that is
set with the inverter address P5-01. You can assign slave addresses from 2 to 63.
Set:
•
P1-12 = 4 (control signal source)
•
P1-14 = 201 (extended parameter menu)
•
P5-01 = 2 - 63 (inverter address communication)
•
the type of speed scaling in P2-28
•
the scaling factor in P2-29.
•
Make sure that the ramps at the slave inverter are set equal to or smaller than the
value at the master.
INFORMATION
Cable set B can be used for setting up the master-slave network. It is not necessary
to use a terminating resistor. For information on the cable sets refer to the catalog.
5.4.5
Fieldbus mode (P1-12 = 5, 6 or 7)
See chapter "Fieldbus mode" (→ 2 92).
5.4.6
MultiMotion mode (P1-12 = 8)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
See "Addendum to the MOVITRAC® LTX operating instructions".
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
69
5
Startup
Hoist function
5.5
Hoist function
The inverter is equipped with a hoist function. When the hoist function is active, all relevant parameters and functions are activated and locked, if necessary. For proper
functioning, a correct motor startup has to be performed as described in chapter
"Startup for hoist function" (→ 2 71).
Also observe the following points in particular:
•
The motor brake control has to performed by the inverter. Connect a brake rectifier
between inverter relay 2 (terminal 17 and 18) and brake, see chapter "Electrical
installation" (→ 2 23).
•
Use a sufficiently dimensioned braking resistor.
•
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends not to run the motor in very low speed ranges or
to keep the load at zero speed without application of the brake.
•
If you need sufficient torque, operate the motor within its nominal range.
To ensure safe operation when the hoist function is active, the following parameters
are preset or ignored by the firmware in case of changes:
•
P1-06: Energy-saving function is deactivated.
•
P2-09/P2-10: Skip frequencies are ignored.
•
P2-26: The flying start function is deactivated.
•
P2-27: The standby mode is deactivated.
•
P2-36: The start mode is edge-triggered (Edgr-r).
•
P2-38: Voltage failure results in coast to a stop.
•
P4-06/P4-07: Maximum torque limits are set to the maximum values.
•
P4-08: Minimum torque limits are set to "0".
•
P4-09: The upper limit for the regenerative torque is set to the maximum permitted
value.
The following hoist parameters are already preset for motors of the same performance
class. However, they can be changed at any time to optimize the system:
•
P2-07: Fixed setpoint speed 7 is the brake release speed (≥ slip speed of the motor).
•
P2-08: Fixed setpoint speed 8 is the brake application speed (≥ slip speed of the
motor).
•
P2-23: Zero speed holding time.
•
P4-13: Release time of the motor brake.
•
P4-14: Application time of the motor brake.
•
P4-15: Torque threshold for the brake release.
•
P4-16: Torque threshold timeout.
The following parameters are locked:
P2-18: Relay contact 2 for controlling the brake rectifier.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
70
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Hoist function
5.5.1
5.5.2
5
General information
•
Clockwise rotating field of the motor corresponds to upward direction.
•
Counterclockwise rotating field of the motor corresponds to downward direction.
•
Stop the motor to reverse the direction of rotation. To do so, activate the brake.
Set the controller inhibit before you reverse the direction of rotation.
Startup for hoist function
Refer to the following section for recommendations for the startup.
Motor data:
•
P1-03/04: Ramp time as short as possible
•
P1-07: Nominal motor voltage
•
P1-08: Nominal motor current
•
P1-09: Rated motor frequency
•
P1-10: Nominal motor speed
Parameter activation:
•
P1-14 = 201 (extended parameter menu)
Motor control:
•
P4-01 = 0 (VFC speed control)
•
P4-05 = Cos φ
In VFC operation, the automatic measuring procedure has to be performed. To
do so, the motor has to be as cold as possible.
Hoist parameter:
P4-12 = 1 (hoist function activated)
Thermal braking resistor protection:
If no sensor is used for protecting the braking resistor, the following parameters can
be used optionally for protection against overtemperature of the braking resistor. However, only a sensor provides adequate protection.
•
P6-19: Braking resistance value
•
P6-20: Braking resistance power
INFORMATION
When hoist mode is activated, the inverter has to be started with the enable. If the
enable is set at the same time or prior to STO, the inverter stays in "STOP" mode.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
To ensure fault-free operation, a braking resistor has to be installed.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
71
5
Startup
Hoist function
5.5.3
Hoisting mode
The following diagram shows hoisting mode.
Setpoint speed
Brake release
speed P2-07
Brake application
speed P2-08
Enable (DI01)
Mechanical brake
Contact relay 2
STO
t1
t2
t 3 t4
t5
t6
t7
18014401720170891
t1
Inverter enable
t1 - t2 The motor runs up to brake release speed
(fixed setpoint speed 7).
t2
Brake release speed is reached.
t2 - t3 Torque threshold P4-15 verified. The inverter indicates a fault if the torque
threshold exceeds the timeout set in P4-16.
t3
Relay opens.
t3 - t4 Brake opens within brake release time P4-13.
t4
Brake is released. The drive runs up to the setpoint speed.
t4 - t5 Normal operation
t5
Inverter lock
t5 - t6 Drive slows down to brake application speed
(fixed setpoint speed 8).
Relay closes.
t6 - t7 Brake applied within brake application time P4-14.
t7
72
Brake is closed and drive stopped.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
t6
Startup
Hoist function
5.5.4
5
Troubleshooting and optimizing the hoist function
SP-Err / ENC02:
Increase the speed error window in P6-07 if this error message appears.
In case of problems such as sagging of the hoist, check the following parameters and/
or adapt:
= Reduce ramp times, pass through slow speed ranges as quickly as
possible.
P7-10
= Adjustment of the stiffness, higher values increase the stiffness of
the application.
P4-15
= Increase torque threshold to brake release.
P7-14/15
= In case of sagging of the hoist, it is recommended to increase the
boost parameters.
P7-07
= Set this parameter to 1.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P1-03/04
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
73
5
Startup
Fire mode/emergency mode
5.6
Fire mode/emergency mode
Set the fire mode/emergency mode as follows:
•
Perform a motor startup.
•
Set parameter P1-14 to "201" to access further parameters.
•
Set parameter P1-15 to "0" to configure the digital inputs.
•
Configure the inputs depending on the requirements in parameter group P9-xx.
For control via terminals, set parameter P9-09 to "9 = terminal control".
•
Set parameter P9-33 Fire mode/emergency mode input selection to the required
input.
•
Set parameter P6-13 to "0" or "1" depending on the wiring.
•
Set parameter P6-14 to the speed that is to be used in fire mode/emergency
mode. You can specify a positive or a negative speed setpoint.
For evaluating the fire mode/emergency modem, the following two indices can be
read-out via index communication:
•
SBus index 11358 is the fire mode/emergency mode start time: Time stamp related to (P0-65) at the time of activation of the fire mode/emergency mode.
•
SBus index 11359 is the fire mode/emergency mode runtime in minutes. It specifies how long the fire mode/emergency mode was active.
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Activating the fire mode/emergency mode has the inverter drive the motor with the
preset values. In this mode, the inverter ignores all faults, shutdowns, setpoints and
enable signals and operates the motor until it is destroyed or even until the loss of
voltage supply. It is also not possible in this mode to perform a reset to the factory
setting.
74
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Operation at 87 Hz characteristic
5.7
5
Operation at 87 Hz characteristic
The V/f ratio remains the same at 87 Hz operation. However, higher power and
speeds are generated which causes a higher current flow.
U
400 V
230 V
50 Hz
87 Hz
f
9007206616827403
Do the following to set "87 Hz characteristic" operation:
•
Set parameter P1-07 to star voltage (data on the motor nameplate).
•
Set parameter P1-08 to delta current (data on the motor nameplate).
•
Set parameter P1-09 to "87 Hz".
•
Set parameter P1-10 to "(synchronous speed at nominal frequency) × (87 Hz /
50 Hz) - (slip speed at nominal frequency)".
Example for calculating P1-10:
DRN80M4: 0.75 kW, 50 Hz
Nominal speed 1440 1/min
P1-10 = 1500 1/min × (87 Hz / 50 Hz) - (1500 1/min - 1440 1/min) = 2550 1/min
INFORMATION
Set P1-01 maximum speed according to your requirements. In 87 Hz operation, the
inverter has to provide a current that is √3-times higher. For this purpose, select an
inverter with a √3-times higher power rating.
5.8
Motor potentiometer function – crane application
The motor potentiometer works like an electromechanical potentiometer that increases
or decreases the internal value depending on the signals at the inputs, and consequently increases or decreases the motor speed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
INFORMATION
In case of deviating terminal assignment, the inputs can also be configured individually.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
75
5
Startup
Motor potentiometer function – crane application
5.8.1
Motor potentiometer operation
The following figure shows the basic function of the motor potentiometer. The description in chapter "Parameter settings" (→ 2 77) is based on the frequently used crane
function and works according to the terminal assignment in chapter "Terminal
assignment" (→ 2 77).
Maximum speed
Fixed setpoint speed 1
Minimum speed
Enable input source
CW/CCW input source
Motor potentiometer
up input source
Motor potentiometer
down input source
Fixed setpoint speed 1
input source
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t7
t8
t9
t10
t11
t12
t13
t1
t1 - t2
t2 - t3
t3
t3 - t4
t4 - t5
t5
t5 - t6
t6 - t7
t7
t7 - t8
t8 - t9
t9
t9 - t11
t11
t11 - t12
76
Inverter enable
Motor runs up to the set minimum speed (P1-02).
Motor maintains minimum speed.
Motor potentiometer up (P9-28) is activated.
As long as the signal is present at P9-28, the motor speed is increased along acceleration ramp
P1-03.
If no signal is present any longer at P9-28, the actual speed is maintained.
Motor potentiometer up (P9-28) is activated.
As long as the signal is present at P9-28, the motor speed is increased along the acceleration ramp
(P1-03) until it reaches maximum speed (P1-01).
The maximum speed is not exceeded and is maintained when the signal is no longer present at
P9-28.
Motor potentiometer down (P9-29) is activated.
As long as the signal is present at P9-29, the motor speed is decreased along deceleration ramp
P1-04.
If no signal is present any longer at P9-28, the actual speed is maintained.
Fixed setpoint speed is activated.
As long as the signal is present at fixed setpoint speed, the motor speed is decreased along deceleration ramp P1-04 until it reaches the fixed setpoint speed. This speed is then maintained.
Motor potentiometer down (P9-29) is activated.
As long as the signal is present at P9-29, the motor speed is decreased along deceleration ramp
P1-04 but not below the minimum speed P1-02.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18014406340232971
Startup
Motor potentiometer function – crane application
5.8.2
5
Terminal assignment
1
2
3
4
5
[1] [2] [3]
6
[4]
7834026891
[1] DI1 Reduce enable/speed
[2] DI2 Increase speed
[3] DI3 Fixed setpoint speed 1
[4] DI4 Change of direction (clockwise rotation/counterclockwise rotation)
5.8.3
Parameter settings
Start up the motor as described in chapter "Startup" (→ 2 59).
Make the following settings to being able to use the motor potentiometer:
•
P1-12 = 0 (control signal source terminal mode)
•
P1-14 = 201 (extended parameter menu)
•
P1-15 = 0 (digital input function selection)
•
P2-37 = 6 (keypad restart speed).
Input configuration:
•
P9-01 = din-1 (input source enable)
•
P9-03 = din-1 (input source for clockwise rotation)
•
P9-06 = din-4 (direction of rotation reversal)
•
P9-09 = on (terminal control enable source)
•
P9-10 = d-Pot (speed source 1)
•
P9-11 = PrE-1 (speed source 2)
•
P9-18 = din-3 (input speed selection 0)
•
P9-28 = din-2 (input source motor potentiometer open).
User settings:
P1-02 = minimum speed
•
P1-03 = acceleration ramp time
•
P1-04 = deceleration ramp time
•
P2-01 = fixed setpoint speed 1.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
77
5
Startup
Examples of analog input scaling and offset setting
5.9
Examples of analog input scaling and offset setting
Analog input format, scaling and offset are connected to each other.
Inverter setting:
P1-01 = 50 Hz
5.9.1
Example 1: Analog input scaling
Control 0 – 40 Hz with analog input 0 – 10 V:
n1 = 0 Hz, n2 = 40 Hz
P2-31 = 80%
Hz
50
Speed
40
30
20
10
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
V
Analog input
13627147915
n -n
40 Hz − 0 Hz
P2 - 31 = 2 1 × 100 % =
× 100 % = 80 %
P1 - 01
50 Hz
22872051/EN – 09/2016
13624278667
78
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Examples of analog input scaling and offset setting
5.9.2
5
Example 2: Analog input offset
Control 15 – 35 Hz with analog input 0 – 10 V:
n1 = nOffset = 15 Hz, n2 = 35 Hz
P2-31 = 40%, P2-32 = -75%
Hz
50
45
Speed
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
V
Analog input
13627144971
n -n
35 Hz − 15 Hz
P2 - 31 = 2 1 × 100 % =
× 100 % = 40 %
P1 - 01
50 Hz
13624281611
−15 Hz
−nOffset
× 100 %
× 100 %
50 Hz
P2 - 32 = P1 - 01
=
= −75 %
P2 - 31
0.40
22872051/EN – 09/2016
13624284555
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
79
5
Startup
Examples of analog input scaling and offset setting
5.9.3
Example 3: Analog input scaling and offset
Control 15 - 45 Hz with analog input 3 - 8 V:
P2-31 = 120%, P2-32 = 5%
Hz
50
45
Speed
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
3
4
5
6
7
8
V
Analog input
18364553227
18364558219
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18364573451
80
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Startup
Fans and pumps
5.10
5
Fans and pumps
The following functions are available for applications with pumps or fans:
5.11
•
Voltage increase/boost (P1-11)
•
Adjustment of the V/f characteristic curve (P4-10, P4-11)
•
Energy-saving function (P1-06)
•
Flying start function (P2-26)
•
Zero speed holding time (P2-23)
•
Standby mode (P2-27)
•
PID controller, see "Parameter group 3: PID controller (level 2)" (→ 2 142)
•
Fire mode/emergency mode, see "Fire mode/emergency mode" (→ 2 74)
•
Deactivating slip compensation via rated motor speed (P1-10)
Motor potentiometer
The motor potentiometer function lets the inverter respond to key commands.
If the digital inputs are activated that increase or decrease the speed, the speed
changes along the preset ramp P1-03 and P1-04.
If both digital inputs are activated at the same time, the inverter stops along the rapid
stop ramp P2-25. If none of the two inputs are activated, the current speed and direction of rotation are maintained.
The enable is superordinate to this function and is necessary for the function.
To use the motor potentiometer function, select one of the possible function selections
of the digital inputs with P1-15 = 10 or 20. See also chapter "P1-15 Digital input
function selection" (→ 2 126).
22872051/EN – 09/2016
When using this function, the arrow-up and arrow-down keys can be used directly at
the inverter.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
81
5
Startup
3-wire control
5.12
3-wire control
The function is activated via the digital input function selection P1-15 = 21.
The 3-wire control principle determines the control.
The enable and direction of rotation signals of the inverter then react edge controlled.
•
Connect start key <CW> with NO contact to digital input DI1.
•
Connect start key <CCW> with NO contact to digital input DI3.
•
Connect stop key as NC contact to digital input DI2.
If you connect <CW> and <CCW> at the same time, the drive decelerates along the
rapid stop ramp P2-25.
5.12.1
Control signal source 3-wire control
DI 1
+24 V
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
+10 V
AI 1
0V
DI 3
DI 2
AI 1
STO+
STO-
10
11
12
13
fA Hz
18826070667
CW/stop
CW
Clockwise rotation
DI 3
CCW/stop
CCW
CCW rotation
DI 2
Enable/stop
[1]
Ramp up (P1-03)
AI 1
Setpoint input AI
[2]
Ramp down (P1-04)
fA
Output frequency
f0
Start/stop frequency
22872051/EN – 09/2016
DI 1
82
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Operation
Inverter status
6
6
Operation
The following information is displayed to being able to read off the operating state of
the inverter at any time:
Status
Abbreviation display
Drive OK
Static inverter status
Drive running
Operating state of the inverter
Fault / trip
Fault
6.1
Inverter status
6.1.1
Static inverter status
The list below shows the abbreviations that are displayed to indicate the inverter
status when the motor is at standstill.
Abbrevi- Description
ation
Power section of inverter disabled. This message is displayed when the inverter is at a standstill
and no error is pending. The inverter is ready for normal operation. The inverter is not enabled.
P-deF
Preset parameters are loaded. This message appears when the user issues the command for
loading the parameters set at the factory. You have to press the <Stop/reset> key before the inverter can resume operation.
Standby
The inverter is in standby mode. When P2-27 > 0 s, this message appears when the inverter has
stopped and the setpoint is also "0".
Inhibit
Is displayed when 24 V and GND are not present at the STO contacts. The output stage is inhibited.
ETL 24
External voltage supply is connected. The functions are limited, see also chapter "24 V backup
mode" (→ 2 48).
22872051/EN – 09/2016
StoP
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
83
6
Operation
Inverter status
6.1.2
Operating state of the inverter
The list below shows the abbreviations that are displayed to indicate the inverter
status when the motor is running.
Pressing the "Navigate" key on the keypad lets you toggle between output frequency,
output current, output power and speed.
Abbreviation
Description
H xxx
Output frequency of the inverter (in Hz). This message is displayed while the inverter is running.
A xxx
Output current of the inverter (in Ampere). This message is displayed while the inverter is running.
P xxx
Current output power of the inverter (in kW). This message is displayed while the inverter is
running.
L xxx
The parameter is locked for changes. Make sure that:
- The parameter lock P2-39 is not activated.
- The inverter is not enabled.
- The inverter is supplied with line voltage.
Auto-t
The motor parameters are measured automatically to configure the motor parameters. Auto
tune runs automatically when receiving the first enable signal after operation with factory-set
parameters. No hardware enable is required for running auto tune.
Ho-run
Reference travel started. Wait until the inverter has reached the reference position. After successful reference travel, "Stop" appears on the display.
xxxx
Output speed of the inverter (in 1/min). This message appears while the inverter is running if
the rated speed of the motor was entered in parameter P1-10.
C xxx
Is the scaling factor "Speed" (P2-21 / P2-22).
......
(flashing
dots)
The output current of the inverter exceeds the current value entered in P1-08.
FirE
Fire mode/emergency mode is active.
The inverter monitors the extent and the duration of the overload. The inverter indicates fault
"I.t-trP" depending on the extent of the overload.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Select lan- List to select one of the available languages. To select a language, use the <Navigate> key.
guage
84
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Operation
Inverter status
6.1.3
6
Status displays of the parameter module
The parameter module status is displayed on the frequency inverter display.
Display
Description
PASS-r
The parameter module successful read/saved the frequency inverter parameters.
OS-Loc
The parameter module is locked. Attempt to read parameter from frequency inverter with
activated parameter module lock.
FAiL-r
The parameter module could not read parameters from the frequency inverter.
PASS-t
The parameter module successfully transferred the parameters to the frequency inverter.
Writing of parameters to the frequency inverter.
FAiL-P
The power ratings of the parameter stored in the parameter module do not match the power
ratings of the programmed frequency inverter.
FAiL-t
The parameter module could not transfer the parameter set to the frequency inverter.
no-dAt
No parameter data was saved in the parameter module.
dr-Loc
The frequency inverter parameters were locked. No new parameter settings could be transferred. Unlock the parameter set of the frequency inverter.
dr-rUn
Frequency inverter is running and cannot accept any new parameter settings. Stop the frequency inverter before programming.
tyPE-E
The parameters for the frequency inverter type saved in the parameter module do not
match the frequency inverter type to be programmed (only writing).
tyPE-F
The parameter module does not yet support the programmed frequency inverter type.
6.1.4
Fault reset
22872051/EN – 09/2016
You can reset a fault by pressing the <Stop/reset> key or by opening and closing digital input 1. For further information, refer to chapter "Error codes" (→ 2 87).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
85
6
Operation
Troubleshooting
6.2
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cause and solution
Overload or overcurrent error of the
unloaded motor during acceleration
Check the star/delta terminal connection in the motor. The nominal
operating voltage of motor and inverter must match. Delta connection always yields the lower voltage of a multi-voltage motor.
Overload or overcurrent – motor does
not turn
Check whether the rotor is blocked. Make sure that the mechanical
brake is released (if installed).
No enable for the inverter – display
shows "StoP"
•
Check whether the hardware enable signal is present at digital
input 1.
•
Ensure proper +10 V user output voltage (between terminals 5
and 7).
•
If faulty, check the wiring of the user terminal strip.
•
Check P1-12 for terminal mode/keypad mode.
•
If keypad mode is selected, press the "Start" key.
•
The line voltage must correspond with the specified values.
The inverter does not start at extremely cold ambient conditions
The inverter might not start at ambient temperatures below –10 °C
Under such conditions, provide a heat source that keeps the ambient temperature on site above –10 °C.
No access to advanced menus
P1-14 must be set to advanced access code. The value is "101"
unless the user has changed the code in P2-40.
6.3
Error history
Parameter P1-13 in parameter mode archives the 4 most recent errors and/or events.
Each error is displayed in abbreviated form. The most recent error is shown first (when
calling P1-13).
This means that any new error is entered at the top of the list followed by the subsequent errors in the order of their appearance. The oldest fault will be deleted from
the error history.
•
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
If the latest error in the error history is an undervoltage fault, no further undervoltage faults will be entered in the error history. The reason is to avoid that the
error history is filled with undervoltage faults, which occur every time the inverter is
switched off.
86
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Operation
Error codes
6.4
Error codes
Error message
Inverter display P0-13
error history
Inverter
display
6
Error code
CANopen
status word if
EmerBit5 = 1
gency
Code
Explanation
Solution
MotionStu
dio coding dec
dec
hex
hex
4-20 F
18
113
0x71
0x1012
Signal loss 4 –
20 mA
AtF-01
40
81
0x51
0x1028
The measured
The measured stator resistance of the motor is asymmetrical.
stator resistance Check to see, if:
fluctuates between • the motor is connected correctly and without error.
the phases.
• the winding has the correct resistance and symmetry.
AtF-02
41
81
0x51
0x1029
The measured
The measured stator resistance of the motor is too high.
stator resistance is Check to see, if:
too high.
• the motor is connected correctly and without error.
• Check whether the input current in P2-30 and P2-33 lies
within the defined range.
• Check the connection cable.
• the power rating of the motor corresponds with the power
rating of the connected inverter.
AtF-03
42
81
0x51
0x102A
Measured motor
inductance is too
low.
The measured motor inductance is too low.
Make sure that the motor is connected correctly and without
error.
AtF-04
43
81
0x51
0x102B
Measured motor
inductance is too
high.
The measured motor inductance is too high. Check to see, if:
• the motor is connected correctly and without error.
• the power rating of the motor corresponds with the power
rating of the connected inverter.
AtF-05
44
81
0x51
0x102C
Timeout of induct- The measured motor parameters are not convergent. Check
ance measureto see, if:
ment
• the motor is connected correctly and without error.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
• the power rating of the motor corresponds with the power
rating of the connected inverter.
dAtA-E
19
98
0x62
0x1013
Internal memory
error (DSP)
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
dAtA-F
17
98
0x62
0x1011
Internal memory
error (IO)
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
E-triP
11
26
0x1A
0x100B
External error at
digital input 5.
NC contact was opened.
• Check motor thermistor (if connected).
Enc-01
30
14
0x0E
0x101E
Communication
The encoder feedback is activated in P6-05, and no encoder
error between en- card is plugged in or the encoder card is not recognized.
coder card and inverter.
ENC02/
SP-Err
31
14
0x0E
0x101F
Speed fault
(P6-07)
The difference between actual speed and setpoint speed is
perceptually larger than the value set in P6-07. This error applies only to vector control or control with encoder feedback.
Set a higher value in P6-07.
If you wish to deactivate the speed monitoring, set P6-07 to
100%.
Enc-03
32
14
0x0E
0x1020
Incorrect PPR
count setting.
Check the parameter settings in P6-06 and P1-10.
Enc-04
33
14
0x0E
0x1021
Encoder channel
A error
The A track of the encoder feedback is not present. Check
the wiring.
Enc-05
34
14
0x0E
0x1022
Encoder channel
B error
The B track of the encoder feedback is not present. Check
the wiring.
Enc-06
35
14
0x0E
0x1023
Encoder channel
A or B error
The A and B track of the encoder feedback are not present.
Check the wiring.
Enc-07
36
14
0x0E
0x1024
RS485 data chan- Communication error between encoder card and encoder.
nel error,
Check the encoder card for correct seat and contact.
HIPERFACE® data
channel error
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
87
6
Operation
Error codes
Error message
Inverter display P0-13
error history
Error code
CANopen
status word if
EmerBit5 = 1
gency
Code
Explanation
Solution
Inverter
display
MotionStu
dio coding dec
dec
hex
hex
Enc-08
37
14
0x0E
0x1025
HIPERFACE® I/O Communication error between encoder card and inverter.
communication
Check the encoder card for correct seat and contact.
channel error
Enc-09
38
14
0x0E
0x1026
HIPERFACE® type During the use of Smart Servo Package, a wrong motor/innot supported.
verter combination was used. Check to see, if:
• The speed class of the CMP.. motor is 4500 1/min.
• The nominal motor voltage equals the nominal inverter
voltage.
• A HIPERFACE® encoder is used.
Enc-10
Trigger: KTY
KTY not triggered or not connected.
Er-LED
39
14
0x0E
Display error
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Err-SC
The keypad lost
Press the STOP key to reset. Check the address of the frethe communication quency inverter.
connection to the
inverter.
Etl-24
External 24 V sup- Line voltage supply not connected. The inverter is externally
ply.
supplied with 24 V.
FAULtY
The communica- Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
tion between controller and power
section is interrupted.
F-Ptc
21
31
0x1F
FAN-F
22
50
FLt-dc
13
7
Ho-trP
27
39
0x1027
0x1015
Motor protection
triggered
The connected motor protection sensor is defined in P2-33
(PTC, TF, TH, KTY or PT1000), and connected to the analog
input 2 (terminal 10).
0x32
0x1016
Internal fan error.
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
0x07
0x320D
DC link ripple too
high.
Check the current supply.
0x27
0x101B
Error during refer- • Check reference cams
ence travel.
• Check limit switch connection
• Check reference travel type setting and the parameters required for it.
Inhibit
Lag-Er
STO safety circuit Check to see if the terminals 12 and 13 are connected coropen.
rectly.
28
42
0x2A
0x101C
Lag error
Check:
• the encoder connection
• the wiring of encoder, motor and line phases
• if the mechanical components can move freely and are not
blocked.
• Extend the ramps.
• Set a higher P component.
• Parameterize the speed controller again.
• Extend the lag error tolerance.
current for acceleration/constant travel.
88
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
• Set PLC Prog Task Priority to 10 ms
• The inverter is operated in Derating and cannot provide the
Operation
Error codes
Error message
Inverter display P0-13
error history
Inverter
display
I.t-trp
Error code
CANopen
status word if
EmerBit5 = 1
gency
Code
MotionStu
dio coding dec
dec
hex
hex
04
8
0x08
0x1004
Explanation
Overload of inverter/motor
(l2t error)
6
Solution
Make sure that:
• The motor nameplate parameters are correctly inserted in
P1-07, P1-08 and P1-09.
• In vector mode (P4-01 = 0 or 1), the motor power factor in
P4-05 is correct.
• Auto Tune has correctly been performed.
Check to see, if:
• The decimals flash (inverter overloaded), increase the acceleration ramp (P1-03) or decrease the motor load.
• The length of the cable meets the requirements.
• The load can move freely and there are no blockages or
other mechanical faults (mechanically check the load).
• The thermal motor protection to UL508C is activated in
P4-17.
O-I
03
1
0x01
0x2303
hO-I
15
1
0x01
0x230F
Short-term overcurrent at the inverter output.
High motor overload.
Fault during stop procedure:
Check for premature brake application.
Fault while enabling the inverter:
Check to see, if:
• The motor nameplate parameters are correctly inserted in
Hardware overcur- P1-07, P1-08 and P1-09.
rent error at the in- • In vector mode (P4-01 = 0 or 1), the motor power factor in
verter output
P4-05 is correct.
(IGBT self-protection in case of
• Auto Tune has correctly been performed.
overload).
• The load can move freely and there are no blockages or
other mechanical faults (mechanically check the load).
• A short circuit between the phases or a ground fault of a
phase occurred at the motor and motor connection cable.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
• The brake is connected correctly, controlled correctly and
correctly releases when the motor has a holding brake.
Reduce the settings of the voltage enhancement in P1-11.
Set a longer run-up time in P1-03.
Disconnect the motor from the inverter. Enable the inverter
again. If this error occurs again, check the entire system and
completely replace the inverter.
Fault during operation:
Check:
• For sudden overload or malfunction.
• the cable connection between inverter and motor.
The acceleration/deceleration time is too short and requires
too much power. If you cannot increase P1-03 or P1-04, use
a larger inverter.
O-hEAt
23
124
0x7C
O-t
8
11
0x0B
0x4117
Ambient temperat- Check if the ambient conditions are within the range specified
ure too high.
for inverters.
Heat sink overtem- The heat sink temperature can be displayed via P0-21. A hisperature
torical protocol is saved in parameter P0-38 in 30 s intervals
prior to a switch off with error. This error message is displayed at a heat sink temperature of ≥90 °C.
Check:
• The ambient temperature of the inverter.
• The inverter cooling and housing dimensions.
• The function of the internal cooling fan of the inverter.
Reduce the settings of the effective clock frequency in parameter P2-24, or the load at motor/inverter.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
89
Error codes
Error message
Inverter display P0-13
error history
Inverter
display
Error code
CANopen
status word if
EmerBit5 = 1
gency
Code
Solution
MotionStu
dio coding dec
dec
hex
hex
O-torq
24
52
0x34
0x1018
Maximum torque
limit timeout.
Check the motor load.
Set a higher value in P6-17 if required.
If you wish to deactivate the torque monitoring, set P6-07 to
0.0 s.
O-Volt
06
7
0x07
0x3206
DC link overvoltage
The error occurs if a high flywheel load or overhauling load is
connected, and the excess regenerative energy is transferred
back to the inverter.
If an error occurs while stopping or during deceleration, increase the deceleration ramp time P1-04 or connect a suitable braking resistor to the inverter.
The proportional gain in P4-03 is reduced in vector mode.
In PID control mode ensure that the ramps are active by reducing P3-11.
Additionally check if the supply voltage is within the specified
range.
Information: The value of the DC bus voltage can be displayed on P0-20. A historical protocol is saved in parameter
P0-36 in 256 ms intervals prior to a switch off with error.
OI-b
01
4
0x04
0x2301
Brake channel
overcurrent,
Brake resistor
overload
Make sure that the connected braking resistor does not fall
below the minimum value approved for the inverter (see technical data). Check the braking resistor and the wiring for possible short circuits.
OL-br
02
4
0x04
0x1002
Braking resistor
overload
The software detected an overload at the braking resistor
and switches off to protect the resistor. Make sure that the
braking resistor is operated within the planned parameters
before performing any changes to parameters or system. To
reduce the load at the resistor, increase the deceleration
time, reduce the loads mass moment of inertia, or connect
additional braking resistors in parallel. Note the minimum resistor values for the used inverter.
OF-01
60
28
0x1C
0x103C
Internal connection to option
module error.
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
OF-02
61
28
0x1C
0x103D
Option module
error
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Out-F
26
82
0x52
0x101A
Inverter output
stage error
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
P-LOSS
14
6
0x06
0x310E
Input phase failure An input phase has been separated or interrupted at an inverter planned for a 3-phase supply.
P-dEF
10
9
0x09
0x100A
Factory settings
are restored.
Ph-Ib
90
Explanation
Unequal voltage at • Check the device input voltage.
the input phases
• Check the values in P0-22, P0-23, P0-24.
The values may deviate maximum ±10%. Use an input choke
if required.
PS-trP
05
200
0xC8
0x1005
Output stage error See error O-I.
(IGBT self-protection in case of
overload)
SC-0b5
12
29
1D
SC-F03
52
41
0x29
0x1034
Fieldbus module
communication
error (fieldbus
side)
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
SC-F04
53
41
0x29
0x1035
Communication
error IO option
card
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Connection
Connection between inverter and keypad.
between inverter
and keypad interrupted.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
6
Operation
Operation
Error codes
Error message
Inverter display P0-13
error history
Error code
CANopen
status word if
EmerBit5 = 1
gency
Code
Explanation
6
Solution
Inverter
display
MotionStu
dio coding dec
dec
hex
hex
SC-F05
54
41
0x29
0x1036
LTX module com- Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
munication error
SC-F01
50
43
0x2B
0x1032
Modbus communication error
Check the communication settings.
SC-F02
51
47
0x2F
0x1033
SBus/CANopen
communication
error
Check:
• The communication connection between inverter and external devices.
• The clearly assigned address per inverter in the network.
SC-LoS
The communica- Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
tion between controller and power
section is interrupted.
SC-OBS
The keypad lost
Press the <Stop> key to reset. Check the address of the inthe communication verter.
connection to the
frequency inverter.
Sto-F
29
115
0x73
0x101D
StoP
th-Flt
STO circuit error
Inverter is defective, replace device.
The inverter is not Activate the enable. Make sure that the enable is switched on
enabled.
after the STO for the hoist function.
16
31
0x1F
0x1010
Faulty thermistor
at heat sink.
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
type-f
Parameter module The used parameter module is not of type LT BP C.
and inverter are
not compatible.
U-dEF
User settings
loaded.
The parameter set saved in P6-26 has been restored.
The torque threshold has not been exceeded in time.
Increase the time in P4-16 or the torque limit in P4-15.
U-torq
25
52
0x34
0x1019
Minimum torque
limit timeout
(hoist).
U-t
09
117
0x75
0x4209
Undertemperature Occurs at an ambient temperature below -10 °C. Increase
the temperature to above -10 °C to start the inverter.
U-Volt
07
198
0xC6
0x3207
DC link undervoltage
Occurs routinely when switching off the inverter.
Check line voltage if this occurs while the inverter is running.
Parameter backup The parameter set was successfully deleted using P6-26.
successfully deleted.
USr-PS
Parameter backup The parameter set was successful saved using P6-26.
successfully completed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
USr-cL
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
91
7
Fieldbus mode
General information
7
Fieldbus mode
7.1
General information
7.1.1
Structure and settings of process data words
Control and status word have a fixed assignment. All the other process data words
can be freely configured as required using parameter group P5-xx.
The structure of process data words is identical for SBus/Modbus RTU/CANopen, as
well as with inserted communication card.
Bit
High byte
Low byte
15 – 8
7 – 0
Process output words
Description
Bit
PA1 Control
word
0
Settings
Output stage inhibit (the motor
coasts to a stop), for brakemotors
the brake is applied immediately.
0: Start
1: Stop
1
Rapid stop along the second decel- 0: Rapid stop
eration ramp/rapid stop ramp
1: Start
(P2-25)
2
Stop along process ramp P1-03 /
P1-04 or PO3
0: Stop
3 – 5
Reserved
0
6
Error reset
Edge 0 set to 1 =
error reset
7 – 15 Reserved
1: Start
0
PO2 Setpoint speed in % (default setting), freely configurable via P5-09
PO3 No function, freely configurable via P5-10
22872051/EN – 09/2016
PO4 No function, freely configurable via P5-11
92
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Fieldbus mode
General information
7
Process input words
Description
PI1
Bit
Status word 0
Settings
Output stage enable
0: Disabled
Byte
Low byte
1: Enabled
1
Frequency inverter ready
for operation
0: Not ready
2
PO data enabled
1 if P1-12 = 5
3 – 4
Reserved
5
Fault/warning
1: Ready
0: No error
1: Fault
6
Positive limit switch active 0: Disabled
(limit switch assignment
1: Enabled
can be set via P1-15 or
1)
P9-30/P9-31).
7
Negative limit switch act- 0: Disabled
ive (limit switch assign1: Enabled
ment can be set via P1-15
or P9-30/P9-31).
Frequency inverter status if bit 5 = 0
High byte
0x01 = STO – Safe torque off active
0x02 = no enable
8 – 15
0x05 = speed control
0x06 = torque control
0x0A = technology function
0x0C = reference travel
Frequency inverter status if bit 5 = 1
PI2
Actual
speed
Freely configurable via P5-12
PI3
Actual current
Freely configurable via P5-13
PI4
No function, freely configurable via P5-14
1) Refer to the addendum to the operating instructions "MOVITRAC® LTX Servo Module for MOVITRAC®
22872051/EN – 09/2016
LTP-B".
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
93
7
Fieldbus mode
General information
7.1.2
Communication example
The following information is sent to the inverter if
•
The digital inputs have been configured and wired properly to enable the inverter.
Description
Value
Description
PO1
0x0000
Stop along the second Deceleration ramp (P2-25).
0x0001
Coast to a stop
0x0002
Stop along the process ramp (P1-04) or (PO3).
0x0003 0x0005
Reserved
0x0006
Accelerate along a ramp (P1-03) or (PO3) and run at setpoint speed
(PO2)
PO2
Control word
Setpoint speed 0x4000
= 16384 = max. speed, e.g. 50 Hz (P1-01) CW
0x2000
= 8192 = 50% of the max. speed, e.g. 25 Hz CW
0xC000
= -16384 = max. speed, e.g. 50 Hz (P1-01) CCW
0x0000
= 0 = min. speed, set in P1-02
0xF100
= 8192 = 50% of the max. speed, e.g. 25 Hz CCW
The process data sent by the inverter should look as follows during operation:
7.1.3
Description
Value
Description
PI1
Status word
0x0407
Status = running, output stage enabled;
inverter ready, PO data enabled
PI2
Actual speed
Should correspond to PO2 (setpoint speed)
PI3
Actual current Depends on speed and load
Parameter settings for the inverter
•
Take the inverter into operation as described in chapter "Simple startup" (→ 2 59).
•
Set the following parameters depending on the bus system used:
Parameters
SBus
P1-12 (control signal source)
P1-14 (extended parameter menu)
CANopen
Modbus RTU1)
5
6
7
201
201
201
12)
12)
12)
P5-01 (inverter address)
1 – 63
1 – 63
1 – 63
P5-02 (SBus baud rate)
Baud rate
Baud rate
--
P5-03 (Modbus baud rate)
--
--
Baud rate
P5-04 (Modbus data format)
--
--
Data format
0-1-2-3
0-1-2-3
0-1-2-3
0.0 – 1.0 – 5.0 s
Communication monitoring is
covered by the Lifetime or Heartbeat functions integrated in
CANopen.
0.0 – 1.0 – 5.0 s
0 = Specified via P1-03/04
1 = specified via fieldbus4)
0 = specified via P1-03/04
1 = specified via fieldbus4)
0 = specified via
P1-03/04
1 = specified via
fieldbus4)
More setting options5) .
More setting options5)
More setting options5)
P1-15 (function selection digital inputs)
P5-053) (behavior in the event of communication failure)
P5-063) (communication failure timeout)
P5-073) (ramp specified via fieldbus)
P5-XX (fieldbus parameter)
2) Default setting; for more setting options, refer to the description of parameter P1-15.
3) These parameters can remain set to their default values for the time being.
4) When specifying the ramp via fieldbus, P5-10 =3 must be set (PO3 = ramp time).
5) You can make more fieldbus settings and define the process data in detail in parameter group P5-xx, see chapter "Parameter group
5"
94
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1) Modbus RTU is not available when the LTX encoder module is installed.
Fieldbus mode
General information
7.1.4
7
Connecting the signal terminals at the inverter
For bus mode, you can connect the signal terminals using the default setting of P1-15
as described in chapter "Overview of signal terminals" (→ 2 44). When the DI3 signal
level changes, the system toggles between the speed setpoint source fieldbus (low)
and fixed setpoint 1 (high).
7.1.5
Establishing a CANopen/SBus network
A CAN network as depicted in the figure below should always have a linear bus structure without stub lines [1] or only with very short ones [2]. The network must have exactly one terminating resistor RT = 120 Ω installed on both ends of the bus. The cable
sets described in the "MOVITRAC® LTP-B" catalog are available for easily establishing such a network.
CAN-High
CAN-High
RT
RT
CAN-Low
CAN-Low
[1]
[2]
7338031755
7338031755
Cable length
The permitted total cable length depends on the baud rate set in parameter P5-02:
125 kBd: 500 m (1640 ft)
•
250 kBd: 250 m (820 ft)
•
500 kBd: 100 m (328 ft)
•
1000 kBd: 25 m (82 ft)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
95
7
Fieldbus mode
Connecting a gateway or a controller (SBus MOVILINK)
Connecting
a gateway
or
a
controller
(SBus MOV
ILINK)
7.2
Connecting a gateway or controller (SBus MOVILINK®)
7.2.1
Specification
The MOVILINK® profile via CAN/SBus is an application profile from
SEW‑EURODRIVE specifically adjusted to SEW inverters. For detailed information,
refer to the "MOVIDRIVE® MDX60B/61B Communication and Fieldbus Device Profile"
manual.
For using SBus, configure the inverter as described in chapter "Parameter settings for
the inverter" (→ 2 94). Status and control word are fixed, all other process data words
can be configured as required in parameter group P5-xx.
For detailed information on the structure of process data words, refer to chapter Structure of process data words of inverters with factory setting. You find a detailed list of
all parameters including the necessary indexes as well as the scaling in chapter
"Parameter register" (→ 2 116).
7.2.2
Electrical installation
Connecting gateway and MOVI‑PLC®.
L1/L L2/N L3
L1/L L2/N L3
L1/L L2/N L3
1
®LT
MOVITRAC
RUN
BUS
FAULT
0
®LT
MOVITRAC
®LT
MOVITRAC
DFP 21B
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
nc
ADDRESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
IOIOI
X30
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
IOIOI
IOIOI
14 15 16 17 18
+
BR
U
V
14 15 16 17 18
+
W
BR
U
V
14 15 16 17 18
+
W
BR
U
V
W
B
D
D
B
C
E
D
max. 8
F
9007206593403147
[A]
Bus connection
[D]
Splitter
[B]
Gateway, e.g. DFx/UOH
[E]
Connection cable
[C]
Connection cable
[F]
Y connector with terminating resistor
INFORMATION
As of firmware version 1.20, a backup mode for maintaining communication in the
event of a power failure is possible, for older versions this is not possible. Please also
observe chapter "24 V backup mode" (→ 2 48).
Instead of a terminating connector of cable set A, you can use the Y adapter of engineering cable set C. This set also includes a terminating resistor. You find detailed information on cable sets in the "MOVITRAC® LTP-B" catalog.
96
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The terminating connector [F] is equipped with 2 terminating resistors and therefore
establishes the terminating connection to CAN/SBus and Modbus RTU.
Fieldbus mode
Connecting a gateway or a controller (SBus MOVILINK)
7
Wiring from the control to the "communication socket RJ45" (→ 2 47) of the inverter:
Side view
Designation
®
MOVI-PLC or Gateway (DFX/UOH)
X26
1 2 3 4 56 7
Third party controller
Terminal at CCU/PLC
Signal
RJ45 socket1)
Signal
X26:1
CAN 1H
2
SBus/CAN bus h
X26:2
CAN 1L
1
SBus/CAN bus l
X26:3
DGND
3
GND
X26:4
Reserved
X26:5
Reserved
X26:6
DGND
X26:7
DC 24 V
X:?2)
Modbus RTU+
8
RS485+ (Modbus RTU)
X:?2)
Modbus RTU-
7
RS485- (Modbus RTU)
X:?2)
DGND
3
GND
1) Please observe: The terminal assignment for the socket of the inverter, not the connector, is specified above.
2) Assignment depends on the third-party controller.
7.2.3
Startup at gateway
•
Connect the gateway as described in chapter "Electrical installation" (→ 2 96).
•
Reset all settings of the gateway to the factory setting.
•
If required, set all connected inverters to SBus MOVILINK® mode as described in
chapter "Parameter settings for the inverter" (→ 2 94). Assign unique SBus addresses (≠ 0!) and set a baud rate matching the gateway (default = 500 kBaud).
•
Set DIP switch AS (auto-setup) on the DFx/UOH gateway from "OFF" to "ON" to
perform an auto-setup for the fieldbus gateway.
The "H1" LED on the gateway lights up repeatedly and then goes off completely.
When the "H1" LED is lit, the gateway or one of the inverters at the SBus has not
been wired properly or has not been taken into operation properly.
•
Refer to the relevant DFx manual for information on how to establish fieldbus communication between DFx/UOH gateway and bus master.
Monitoring sent data
The data sent via gateway can be monitored as follows:
Using MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio via the X24 engineering interface of the gateway or optionally via Ethernet.
•
Via the website of the gateway, for example to the DFE3x Ethernet gateway.
•
You can check which process data are transferred with the respective parameters
in parameter group 0.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
97
7
Fieldbus mode
Connecting a gateway or a controller (SBus MOVILINK)
7.2.4
Startup at a CCU
Before taking the inverter into operation with "Drive Startup" in MotionStudio, you have
to set the following parameters directly on the inverter:
7.2.5
•
Set parameter P1-14 to "1" to obtain access to the LTX-specific parameter group
P1-01 – P1-20.
•
If a HIPERFACE® encoder is connected to the encoder card, then P1-16 must indicate the proper motor type. If not, select the proper motor type using the <Up>
and <Down> keys.
•
Assign a unique inverter address in P1-19. Changing these parameters will directly
affect parameters P5-01 and P5-02.
•
Set the SBus baud rate (P1-20) to 500 kBaud.
MOVI‑PLC® motion protocol (P1-12 = 8)
If you operate the inverter with or without LTX encoder module, with MOVI-PLC® or
CCU, the following parameters have to be set on the inverter:
Set P1-14 to "1" for access to the LTX-specific parameter group. Parameters
P1-01 – P1-20 are then visible.
•
If a HIPERFACE® encoder is connected to the encoder card, then P1-16 indicates
the proper motor type. If not, select the respective motor type using the "Up" and
"Down" keys.
•
Assign a unique inverter address in P1-19.
•
Set the SBus baud rate (P1-20) to "1000 kBaud".
•
Perform a Drive Startup with the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
98
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Fieldbus mode
Modbus RTU
7.3
7
Modbus RTU
The inverters support communication via Modbus RTU. Holding registers (03) are
used for reading, and single holding registers (06) for writing. For using Modbus RTU,
configure the inverter as described in chapter "Parameter settings for the
inverter" (→ 2 94).
Note: Modbus RTU is not available when the LTX encoder module is plugged.
7.3.1
7.3.2
Specification
Protocol
Modbus RTU
Error checking
CRC
Baud rate
9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps
(default)
Data format
1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
Physical format
RS485 2 core
User interface
RJ45
Electrical installation
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The structure is the same as for the CAN/SBus network. The maximum number of bus
nodes is 32. The permitted cable length depends on the baud rate. With a baud rate of
115200 bps and a 0.5 mm2 cable, the maximum cable length is 1200 m. For the connection assignment for the RJ45 communication socket, refer to chapter "RJ45
communication socket" (→ 2 47).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
99
7
Fieldbus mode
Modbus RTU
7.3.3
Register allocation of the process data words
The process data words are allocated to the Modbus registers shown in the table. The
status and control words have a fixed allocation. The other process data words can be
configured as required in parameter group P5-xx.
The table shows the default allocation of process data words. All other registers are
usually allocated in such a way that they correspond to the parameter number (101 =
P1-01). However, this does not apply to parameter group 0.
Register
Upper byte
Lower byte
Command
Type
1
PO1 control word (fixed)
03, 06
Read / Write
2
PO2 (default setting in P5-09 =1; speed setpoint)
03, 06
Read / Write
3
PO3 (default setting in P5-10 =7; no function)
03, 06
Read / Write
4
PO4 (default setting in P5-11 =7; no function)
03, 06
Read / Write
5
Reserved
03
Read
6
PI1 status word (fixed)
03
Read
7
PI2 (defafult setting in P5-12 =1; actual speed)
03
Read
8
PI3 (default setting in P5-13 =2; actual current)
03
Read
9
PI4 (default setting in P5-14 =4; power)
03
Read
…
For more registers, refer to chapter "Parameter registers" (→ 2 116).
-
You find the complete allocation of parameters and registers as well as the scaling of
data in the memory allocation plan in chapter "Parameter registers" (→ 2 116).
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Many bus masters address the first register as register 0. It might therefore be necessary to deduct the value "1" from the register number given below to obtain the correct register address.
100
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Fieldbus mode
Modbus RTU
7.3.4
7
Data flow example
In this example, the following parameters are read by the controller (PLC address
base = 1):
•
P1-07 (rated motor voltage, modbus register 107)
•
P1-08 (rated motor current, modbus register 108).
Request master → slave (Tx)
Reading register
information
Address
Function
Data
CRC check
Start address
01
Number of registers
Read
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
crc16
03
00
6A
00
02
E4 17
Response slave → master (Rx)
Address
Function
Data
CRC check
Number of data bytes
(n)
Read
01
High byte
03
Information
n/2 register
Low byte
Register 107 / 108
04
00 E6
00 2B
crc16
5B DB
Explanation to the communication example:
Tx = Send from perspective of the bus master.
Address
Device address 0x01 = 1
Function
03 read/06 write
Start address
Register start address = 0x006A = 106
Number of registers
Number of requested registers from start address (register 107/108).
2 × CRC bytes
CRC_high, CRC_low
Rx = Received from perspective of the bus master.
Address
Device address 0x01 = 1
Function
03 read/06 write
Number of data bytes
0x04 = 4
Register 108 high byte
0x00 = 0
Register 108 low byte
0x2B = 43% of the nominal inverter current
Register 107 high byte
0x00 = 0
Register 107 low byte
0xE6 = 230 V
2 × CRC bytes
CRC_high, CRC_low
The following example describes the second process data word of the inverter (PLC
address base = 1):
Process output data word 2 = modbus register 2 = setpoint speed.
Request master → slave (Tx)
Sending register
information
Address
Function
Data
CRC check
Start address
01
Information
Write
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
crc16
06
00
01
07
00
DB 3A
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Response slave → master (Rx)
Address
Function
Data
CRC check
Start address
01
Information
Write
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
crc16
06
00
01
07
00
DB 3A
Explanation to the communication example:
Tx = Send from perspective of the bus master.
Address
Device address 0x01 = 1
Function
03 read/06 write
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
101
Modbus RTU
Start address
Register start address =0x0001 = 1 (first register to be written on = 2 PA2)
Information
0700 (setpoint speed)
2 × CRC bytes
CRC_high, CRC_low
22872051/EN – 09/2016
7
Fieldbus mode
102
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7.4
7
CANopen
The inverters support communication via CANopen. For using CANopen, configure
the inverter as described in chapter "Parameter settings for the inverter" (→ 2 94).
Following a general overview of how to establish a communication connection via
CANopen and the process data communication. The CANopen configuration is not described.
For detailed information on the CANopen profile, refer to the "MOVIDRIVE®
MDX60B/61B Communication and Fieldbus Unit Profile" manual.
7.4.1
Specification
CANopen communication is implemented according to the specification DS301 version 4.02 of CAN in automation (see www.can-cia.de). A specific device profile, such
as DS402, is not implemented.
7.4.2
Electrical installation
See chapter "Establishing a CANopen/SBus network" (→ 2 95).
7.4.3
COB IDs and functions in the inverter
The CANopen profile provides the following COB ID (Communication Object Identifier)
and functions.
Messages and COB IDs
Type
COB ID
Function
NMT
000h
Network management
Sync
080h
Synchronous message with dynamically configurable COB ID
Emergency
080h + device address
Emergency message with dynamically configurable COB ID
PDO11) (Tx)
180h + device address
PDO1 (Rx)
200h + device address
PDO2 (Tx)
280h + device address
PDO (Process Data Object) PDO1 is pre-mapped and activated by default.
PDO2 is pre-mapped and activated by default. Transmission mode (synchronous, asynchronous, event), COB ID and mapping can be configured as required.
PDO2 (Rx)
300h + device address
SDO (Tx)2)
580h + device address
SDO (Rx)2)
600h + device address
Error control
700h + device control
SDO channel for parameter data exchange with the CANopen master
Guarding and heartbeat functions are supported. COB ID can be set to another
value.
1) The inverter supports up to 2 process data objects (PDO). All PDOs are pre-mapped and active with transmission mode 1 (cyclical
and synchronous). This means that the Tx-PDO is sent after every SYNC pulse regardless of whether the content of the Tx-PDO
has changed or not.
2) The inverter SDO channel supports only expedited transmission. The SDO mechanisms are described in detail in the CANopen
specification DS301.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
INFORMATION
Transmitting speed, current or similar values that change quickly via Tx-PDO results
in a very high load on the bus.
To limit the bus load to predictable values, you can use the inhibit time, see section
"Inhibit time" in the "MOVIDRIVE® MDX60B/61B Communication and Fieldbus
Device Profile" manual.
•
Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) are depicted from perspective of the slave.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
103
7
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7.4.4
Supported transmission modes
The various transmission types can be selected for every process data project (PDO)
in the network management (NMT).
The following transmission types are supported for Rx-PDOs:
Rx PDO transmission mode
Transmission
type
Mode
Description
0 – 240
Synchronous
The received data are transmitted to the inverter as soon as the next synchronization message is received.
254, 255
Asynchronous
The received data are transmitted to the inverter without delay.
The following transmission types are supported for Tx PDOs:
Tx PDO transmission mode
Transmission
type
0
Mode
Description
Acyclic synchronous Tx PDO is only transmitted if the process data have changed and a SYNC object was received.
1 – 240
Cyclic synchronous
254
Asynchronous
Tx PDOs are only transmitted when the corresponding Rx PDO has been received.
255
Asynchronous
Tx PDOs are always transmitted as soon as the PDO data has changed.
7.4.5
Tx PDOs are transmitted synchronously and cyclically. The transmission type indicates the
number of the SYNC object required for triggering transmission of the Tx PDO.
Default allocation plan of process data objects (PDO)
The following table shows the default mapping of the PDOs:
PDO default mapping
Object no.
Rx PDO1
Tx PDO1
Rx PDO 2
Tx PDO2
Mapped
object
Length
Mapping with default setting
1
2001h
Unsigned 16
PO1 control word (fixed)
2
2002h
Integer 16
PO2 (default setting in P5-09 =1; speed setpoint)
3
2003h
Unsigned 16
PO3 (default setting in P5-10 =7; no function)
4
2004h
Unsigned 16
PO4 (default setting in P5-11 =7; no function)
1
2101h
Unsigned 16
PI1 status word (fixed)
2
2102h
Integer 16
PI2 (default setting in P5-12 =1; actual speed)
3
2103h
Unsigned 16
PI3 (default setting in P5-13 =2; actual current)
4
2104h
Integer 16
PI4 (default setting in P5-14 =4; power)
1
2016h
Unsigned 16
Fieldbus analog output 1
2
2017h
Unsigned 16
Fieldbus analog output 2
3
2015h
Unsigned 16
Fieldbus PID reference
4
0006h
Unsigned 16
Dummy
1
2118h
Unsigned 16
Analog input 1
2
2119h
Integer 16
Analog input 2
3
211Ah
Unsigned 16
State of inputs and outputs
4
2116h
Unsigned 16
Inverter temperature
Transmission
type
1
1
1
1
Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) are depicted from perspective of the slave.
Note: Modified default settings are lost after power off and on again. This means the
settings are restored to default values after power off.
104
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
INFORMATION
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7.4.6
7
Data flow example
Process data communication example with default setting:
Word 1
COB ID
D
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
DB Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 5 Byte 6
Description
1
0x701
Tx
1
"00"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BootUpMessage
2
0x000
Rx
2
"01"
"01"
-
-
-
-
-
-
Node Start (operational)
3
0x201
Rx
8
"06"
"00"
"00"
"20"
"00"
"00"
"00"
"00"
Enable + setpoint speed
4
0x080
Rx
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
0x181
Tx
8
"C7"
"05"
"00"
"20"
"A2"
"00"
"28"
"00"
Process data object 1
6
0x281
Tx
8
"29"
"09"
"00"
"00"
"01"
"1F"
"AC"
"0D"
Process data object 2
SYNC telegram
After a byte swap, the table looks as follows:
Word 4
COB ID D
DB
Word 3
Word 2
Word 1
Byte 8 Byte 7 Byte 6 Byte 5 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Description
1
0x701
Tx
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
"00"
BootUpMessage
2
0x000
Rx
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
"01"
"01"
Node Start (operational)
3
0x201
Rx
8
"00"
"00"
"00"
"00"
"20"
"00"
"00"
"06"
Enable + setpoint speed (byte swap)
4
0x080
Rx
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
0x181
Tx
8
"00"
"28"
"00"
"A2"
"20"
"00"
"05"
"C7"
Process data object 1
6
0x281
Tx
8
"0D"
"AC"
"1F"
"01"
"00"
"00"
"09"
"29"
Process data object 2
SYNC telegram
Explanation of the data:
Word 4
COB ID Explanation of the COB
ID
Word 3
Word 2
Word 1
Byte 8
Byte 7
Byte 6
Byte 5
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 2
Byte 1
-
Placeholder
1
0x701 BootUp message + device
address 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
0x000
NMT service
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
0x201
Rx-PDO1 + device address 1
-
-
4
0x080
SYNC telegram
-
-
5
0x181
Tx PDO1 + device address
Output power
Output current
Actual speed
Status word
6
0x281
Tx PDO2 + device address
Inverter temperature
IO status
Analog input 2
Analog input 1
Ramp specification
-
-
Setpoint speed
-
-
Bus status Device address
Control word
-
-
Example of reading the index allocation by means of service device object (SDO):
Request controller → inverter (index: 1A00h)
Response inverter → controller: 10 00 01 21h → byte swap: 2101 00 10 h.
Explanation of the response:
→ 2101 = index in the manufacturer-specific object table
→ 00h = subindex
22872051/EN – 09/2016
→ 10h = data width = 16 bit x 4 = 64 bit = 8 byte mapping length.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
105
7
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7.4.7
Table of CANopen-specific objects
CANopen-specific objects
Access
Type
PDO map Default value
1000h
0
Device type
RO
Unsigned 32
N
0
1001h
0
Error register
RO
Unsigned 8
N
0
1002h
0
Manufacturer status register
RO
Unsigned 16
N
0
1005h
0
COB-ID Sync
RW
Unsigned 32
N
00000080h
1008h
0
Manufacturer device name
RO
String
N
LTPB
1009h
0
Manufacturer hardware version
RO
String
N
x.xx (e.g. 1.00)
100Ah
0
Manufacturer software version
RO
String
N
x.xx (e.g. 1.12)
100Ch
0
Guard time [1 ms]
RW
Unsigned 16
N
0
100Dh
0
Life time factor
RW
Unsigned 8
N
0
1014h
0
COB-ID EMCY
RW
Unsigned 32
N
00000080h+Node ID
1015h
0
Inhibit time emergency [100 μs]
RW
Unsigned 16
N
0
1017h
0
Producer heart beat time [1 ms]
RW
Unsigned 16
N
0
1018h
0
Identity object no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
4
1
Vendor ID
RO
Unsigned 32
N
0x00000059
2
Product code
RO
Unsigned 32
N
Depends on inverter
3
Revision number
RO
Unsigned 32
N
x.xx (IDL version: 0.33)
4
Serial number
RO
Unsigned 32
N
e.g. 1234/56/789 1)
0
SDO parameter no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
2
1
COB-ID client -> server (Rx)
RO
Unsigned 32
N
00000600h+Node ID
2
COB-ID server -> client (Tx)
RO
Unsigned 32
N
00000580h+Node ID
0
Rx PDO1 comms param no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
2
1
Rx PDO1 COB-ID
RW
Unsigned 32
N
00000200h+Node ID
2
Rx PDO1 transmission type
RW
Unsigned 8
N
1
0
Rx PDO2 comms param no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
2
1
Rx PDO2 COB-ID
RW
Unsigned 32
N
00000300h+Node ID
2
Rx PDO2 transmission type
RW
Unsigned 8
N
1
0
Rx PDO1 mapping / no. of entries
RW
Unsigned 8
N
4
1
Rx PDO1 1st mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20010010h
2
Rx PDO1 2nd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20020010h
3
Rx PDO1 3rd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20030010h
4
Rx PDO1 4th mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20040010h
0
Rx PDO2 mapping / no. of entries
RW
Unsigned 8
N
4
1
Rx PDO2 1st mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20160010h
2
Rx PDO2 2nd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20170010h
3
Rx PDO2 3rd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
20150010h
4
Rx PDO2 4th mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
00060010h
0
Tx PDO1 comms param no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
3
1
Tx PDO1 COB-ID
RW
Unsigned 32
N
40000180h+Node ID
2
Tx PDO1 transmission type
RW
Unsigned 8
N
1
3
Tx PDO1 inhibit time [100μs]
RW
Unsigned 16
N
0
0
Tx PDO2 comms param no. of entries
RO
Unsigned 8
N
3
1
Tx PDO2 COB-ID
RW
Unsigned 32
N
40000280h+Node ID
2
Tx PDO2 transmission type
RW
Unsigned 8
N
1
3
Tx PDO2 inhibit time [100μs]
RW
Unsigned 16
N
0
0
Tx PDO1 mapping / no. of entries
RW
Unsigned 8
N
4
1
Tx PDO1 1st mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21010010h
2
Tx PDO1 2nd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21020010h
3
Tx PDO1 3rd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21030010h
4
Tx PDO1 4th mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21040010h
1200h
1400h
1401h
1600h
1601h
1800h
1801h
1A00h
106
Sub in- Function
dex
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Index
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7
CANopen-specific objects
Index
1A01h
Sub in- Function
dex
Access
Type
PDO map Default value
0
Tx PDO2 mapping / no. of entries
RW
Unsigned 8
N
4
1
Tx PDO2 1st mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21180010h
2
Tx PDO2 2nd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21190010h
3
Tx PDO2 3rd mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
211A0010h
4
Tx PDO2 4th mapped object
RW
Unsigned 32
N
21160010h
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1) Output of the last 9 numbers of the serial number.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
107
7
Fieldbus mode
CANopen
7.4.8
Table of manufacturer-specific objects
The manufacturer-specific objects of the inverter are defined as follows:
Manufacturer-specific objects
Index
Sub index
Function
Access
Type
PDO
map
Note
2000h
0
Reserved / no function
RW
Unsigned 16
Y
Read as 0, writing not possible
2001h
0
PO1
RW
Integer 16
Y
Defined as command
2002h
0
PO2
RW
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-09
2003h
0
PO3
RW
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-10
2004h
0
PO4
RW
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-11
2010h
0
Control command register
RW
Unsigned 16
Y
2011h
0
Speed reference (RPM)
RW
Integer 16
Y
1 = 0.2 RPM
2012h
0
Speed reference (percentage)
RW
Integer 16
Y
4000HEX = 100% P1-01
2013h
0
Torque reference
RW
Integer 16
Y
1000DEC = 100%
2014h
0
User ramp reference
RW
Unsigned 16
Y
1 = 1 ms (reference to 50 Hz)
2015h
0
Fieldbus PID reference
RW
Integer 16
Y
1000HEX = 100%
2016h
0
Fieldbus analog output 1
RW
Integer 16
Y
1000HEX = 100%
2017h
0
Fieldbus analog output 2
RW
Integer 16
Y
1000HEX = 100%
2100h
0
Reserved / no function
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
Read as 0
2101h
0
PI1
RO
Integer 16
Y
Defined as status
2102h
0
PI2
RO
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-12
2103h
0
PI3
RO
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-13
2104h
0
PI4
RO
Integer 16
Y
Configured by P5-14
2110h
0
Drive status register
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
2111h
0
Speed reference (RPM)
RO
Integer 16
Y
1 = 0.2 RPM
2112h
0
Speed reference (percentage)
RO
Integer 16
Y
4000HEX = 100 % P1-01
2113h
0
Motor current
RO
Integer 16
Y
1000DEC = rated inverter current
2114h
0
Motor torque
RO
Integer 16
Y
1000DEC = rated motor torque
2115h
0
Motor power
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
1000DEC = inverter nominal power
2116h
0
Inverter temperature
RO
Integer 16
Y
1DEC = 0.01 °C
2117h
0
DC bus value
RO
Integer 16
Y
1DEC = 1 V
2118h
0
Analog input 1
RO
Integer 16
Y
1000HEX = entire range
2119h
0
Analog input 2
RO
Integer 16
Y
1000HEX = entire range
211Ah
0
Digital input & output status
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
LB= input, HB = output
211Bh
0
Analog output 1
RO
Integer 16
Y
211Ch
0
Analog output 2
RO
Integer 16
Y
2121h
0
Scope channel 1
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
2122h
0
Scope channel 2
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
2123h
0
Scope channel 3
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
2124h
0
Scope channel 4
RO
Unsigned 16
Y
2AF8h1)
0
SBus parameter start index
RO
-
N
11000d
…
0
SBus parameters
RO/RW
-
N
…
2C6F
0
SBus parameter end index
RW
-
N
11375d
7.4.9
Emergency code objects
See chapter "Error codes" (→ 2 87).
108
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1) Objects 2AF8h – 2C6EF correspond with SBus parameter indexes 11000d – 11375d, some of them are read-only.
Service
Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE
8
8
Service
To ensure fault-free operation, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you check the
ventilation openings in the housing at regular intervals and clean them if necessary.
8.1
Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE
If you are unable to rectify a fault, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE Service. For the addresses, refer to www.sew‑eurodrive.com.
When contacting the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service, always specify the following information so that our service personnel can assist you more effectively:
8.2
•
Information on the device type on the nameplate (e.g. type designation, serial
number, part number, product key, purchase order number)
•
Brief description of the application
•
Error message on the status display
•
Nature of the fault
•
Accompanying circumstances
•
Unusual events preceding the problem
Extended storage
If the device is stored for a long time, connect it to the supply system voltage for at
least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the service life of the device may be reduced.
Procedure when maintenance has been neglected:
Electrolytic capacitors are used in the frequency inverters. They are subject to aging
effects when de-energized. This effect can damage the capacitors if the device is connected using the nominal voltage after a longer period of storage.
If you have not performed maintenance regularly, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends
that you increase the line voltage slowly up to the maximum voltage. This can be
done, for example, by using a variable transformer for which the output voltage has
been set according to the following overview.
The following steps are recommended:
AC 230 V devices:
•
Step 1: AC 170 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 2: AC 200 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 3: AC 240 V for 1 hour
22872051/EN – 09/2016
AC 400 V devices:
•
Step 1: AC 0 V to AC 350 V within a few seconds
•
Step 2: AC 350 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 3: AC 420 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 4: AC 480 V for 1 hour
AC 575 V devices:
•
Step 1: AC 0 V to AC 350 V within a few seconds
•
Step 2: AC 350 V for 15 minutes
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
109
8
Service
Waste disposal
•
Step 3: AC 420 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 3: AC 500 V for 15 minutes
•
Step 4: AC 600 V for 1 hour
After you have completed the regeneration process, the device can be used immediately or stored again for an extended period with maintenance.
8.3
Waste disposal
Please observe current regulations. Dispose of the following materials in accordance
with the regulations in force:
Electronics scrap (printed circuit boards)
•
Plastic (housing)
•
Sheet metal
•
Copper
•
Aluminum
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
110
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Overview of parameters
9
Parameters
9.1
Overview of parameters
9.1.1
Parameters for realtime monitoring (read only)
9
Parameter group 0 gives access to internal inverter parameters for monitoring purposes. These parameters cannot be changed.
Parameter group 0 is visible if P1-14 is set to "101" or "201".
22872051/EN – 09/2016
ParaSEW in- Modbus Description
meters
dex
register
Display range
Explanation
11358
Fire mode/emergency
mode start time
Time stamp related to (P0-65) at the time of activation of the fire mode/emergency mode
11359
Fire mode/emergency
mode
Runtime in minutes how long the fire mode/emergency mode was active
10
Output power
100 = 1.00 kW
18
Scope channel 1
Selected channel assignment LT shell scope (permanent).
19
Scope channel 2
Selected channel assignment LT shell scope (permanent).
P0-01
11210
20
Value of analog input 1
0 – 100 %
1000 = 100% ≙ max input voltage or input current.
P0-02
11211
21
Value of analog input 2
0 – 100 %
1000 = 100% ≙ max input voltage or input current.
P0-03
11212
11
Digital input state
Binary value
Status of the digital inputs of the basic device and
option
DI8*; DI7*; DI6*; DI5; DI4; DI3; DI2; DI1
*Only available with the matching option module.
P0-04
11213
22
Speed controller setpoint
0 – 100 %
68 = 6.8 Hz; 100% = base frequency (P1-09)
P0-05
11214
41
Torque controller setpoint
0 – 100 %
2000 = 200.0%; 100% = nominal motor torque
P0-06
11215
Digital speed setpoint in
keypad mode
-P1-01 – P1-01 in Hz
Speed displayed in Hz or 1/min
P0-07
11216
Speed setpoint via commu- -P1-01 – P1-01 in Hz
nication connection
–
P0-08
11217
PID reference
0 – 100 %
PID reference
P0-09
11218
Actual PID value
0 – 100 %
Actual PID value
P0-10
11219
PID output
0 – 100 %
PID output
P0-11
11270
Present motor voltage
V rms
Effective voltage value at the motor
P0-12
11271
Output torque
0 – 200.0%
Torque output in %
P0-13
11272 –
11281
Error log
Latest 4 error mesShows the last 4 errors.
sages with time stamp You can toggle between sub-items by pressing the
<Up>/<Down> keys.
P0-14
11282
Magnetizing current (Id)
A rms
Magnetizing current in A rms
P0-15
11283
Rotor current (Iq)
A rms
Rotor current in A rms
P0-16
11284
Magnetic field strength
0 – 100 %
Magnetic field strength
P0-17
11285
Reserved
P0-18
11286
Reserved
P0-19
11287
P0-20
11220
23
DC link voltage
V DC
600 = 600 V (internal DC link voltage)
P0-21
11221,
11222
24
Inverter temperature
°C
40 = 40 °C (temperature inside the inverter)
P0-22
11288
DC link voltage ripple
V rms
Internal DC link voltage ripple
P0-23
11289,
11290
Total time over 80 °C (heat Hours and minutes
sink)
Time during which the inverter was operated at >
80 °C
P0-24
11237,
11238
Total time over 60 °C (ambient)
Time during which the inverter was operated at >
60 °C
P0-25
11291
Rotor speed (calculated via Hz
motor model)
Applies only to vector mode
Accuracy 0.5%
P0-26
11292,
11293
30
kWh counter (can be reset) 0.0 – 999.9 kWh
100 = 10.0 kWh (cumulative energy consumption)
32
kWh counter
Reserved
Hours and minutes
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
111
Overview of parameters
ParaSEW in- Modbus Description
meters
dex
register
Display range
Explanation
P0-27
0.0 – 65535 MWh
100 = 10.0 MWh (cumulative energy consumption)
31
MWh counter
33
MWh counter (can be reset)
P0-28
11247 –
11250
Software version and
checksum
e.g. "1 1.00", "1 4F3C" Version number and checksum, firmware.
"2 1.00", "2 Ed8A"
P0-29
11251 –
11254
Inverter type
e.g. "HP 2", "2 400", "3- Version number and checksum.
PhASE"
P0-30
11255
25
Inverter serial number 4
26
Inverter serial number 3
27
Inverter serial number 2
000000 – 000000
(SN grp 1)
000-00 – 999-99
(SN grp 2, 3)
28
Inverter serial number 1
56 → 561723/01/031
29
Status relay output
− ; − ; − ; RL5; RL4; RL3; RL2; RL1
The relay status is also displayed without relay option depending on the setting in P5-15 bis P5-20.
34
Inverter operating time
(hours)
35
Inverter operating time
(minutes/seconds)
Ex: 2347 = 2347s = 39m 07s → 6h 39m 07s
P0-31
112
11294,
11295
11296,
11297
Hours and minutes
31 → 561723/01/031
1 → 561723/01/031
1723 → 561723/01/031
Ex: 6 = 6h 39m 07s
P0-32
11298,
11299
Runtime since the last fault Hour/min/sec
(1)
Runtime after the inverter enable until the first fault
occurred. If the inverter is not enabled, the runtime
clock is stopped. The counter is reset the first time
the inverter is enabled after an error is acknowledged or the first time the inverter is enabled after a
power failure
P0-33
11300,
11301
Runtime since the last fault Hour/min/sec
(2)
Runtime after the inverter enable until the first fault
occurred. If the inverter is not enabled, the runtime
clock is stopped. The counter is reset the first time
the inverter is enabled after an error is acknowledged or the first time the inverter is enabled after a
power failure.
P0-34
11302,
11303
36
Inverter runtime after last
controller inhibit (hours)
6 = 6h 11s − runtime clock is reset after inverter inhibit.
37
Inverter runtime after last
controller inhibit (minutes/
seconds)
11 = 6h 11s − runtime clock is reset after inverter inhibit.
Runtime clock for internal fan.
Hour/min/sec
P0-35
11304,
11305
Inverter inhibit, inverter fan Hour/min/sec
runtime
P0-36
11306 –
11313
DC link voltage log
(256 ms)
The last 8 values prior The last 8 values prior to the fault.
to the fault
P0-37
11314 –
11321
DC link voltage ripple log
(20 ms)
The last 8 values prior The last 8 values prior to the fault.
to the fault
P0-38
11322 –
11329
Temperature sensor power The last 8 values prior The last 8 values prior to the fault.
electronics
to the fault
P0-39
11239 –
11246
Temperature sensor control The last 8 values prior The last 8 values prior to the fault.
electronics
to the fault
P0-40
11330 –
11337
Motor current log (256 ms) The last 8 values prior The last 8 values prior to the fault.
to the fault
P0-41
11338
Counter for critical faults
-O-I
–
Counter for overcurrent faults.
P0-42
11339
Counter for critical faults
-O-Volt
–
Counter for overvoltage faults.
P0-43
11340
Counter for critical faults
-U-Volt
–
Counter for undervoltage faults. Also during power
off.
P0-44
11341
Counter for critical faults
-O-T
–
Counter for overtemperature faults of the heat sink.
P0-45
11342
Counter for critical faults
-b O-I
–
Counter for short-circuit faults of the brake chopper.
P0-46
11343
Counter for critical faults
O-heat
–
Counter for overtemperature faults due to high ambient temperature.
P0-47
11223
Counter for internal I/O
communication errors
0 – 65535
–
P0-48
11344
Counter for internal DSP
communication errors
0 – 65535
–
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
9
Parameters
Parameters
Overview of parameters
ParaSEW in- Modbus Description
meters
dex
register
Display range
Explanation
P0-49
11224
Counter for Modbus communication errors
0 – 65535
–
P0-50
11225
Counter for CAN bus com- 0 – 65535
munication errors
–
P0-51
11256 –
11258
Incoming process data
PI1, PI2, PI3
Hex value
3 entries; incoming process data from the perspective of the controller.
P0-52
11259 –
11261
Outgoing process data
PO1, PO2, PO3
Hex value
3 entries; outgoing process data from the perspective of the controller.
P0-53
Current phase offset and
reference value for U
Internal value
2 entries; first is reference value, second is measured value; no decimal place for both values.
P0-54
Current phase offset and
reference value for V
Internal value
2 entries; first is reference value, second is measured value; no decimal place for both values.
P0-55
Current phase offset and
reference value for W
Internal value (not
available for some inverters)
2 entries; first is reference value, second is measured value; no decimal place for both values.
P0-56
Max. switch-on time of
braking resistor, operating
cycle of braking resistor
Internal value
2 entries
Ud/Uq
Internal value
2 entries
P0-58
11345
Encoder speed
Hz, 1/min
Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal place.
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-59
11226
Frequency input speed
Hz, 1/min
Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal place.
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-60
11346
Calculated slip speed value Internal value (only with Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal place.
V/f control)
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Hz, 1/min
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-61
11227
Value for speed hysteresis/ Hz, 1/min
relay control
Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal place.
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-62
11347,
11348
Speed static
Internal value
Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal place.
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-63
11349
Speed setpoint after the
ramp
Hz, 1/min
Scaling with 3000 = 50.0 Hz with one decimal position.
0.0 Hz ~ 999.0 Hz, 1000 Hz ~ 2000 Hz
Can be displayed in 1/min if P1-10 ≠ 0.
P0-64
11350
Internal PWM frequency
4 – 16 kHz
0 = 2 kHz
1 = 4 kHz
2 = 6 kHz
3 = 8 kHz
4 = 12 kHz
5 = 16 kHz
P0-65
11351,
11352
Inverter service life
Hour/min/sec
2 entries; first for hour, second for minute and
second.
P0-66
11353
I.t_trip counter
0 – 100 %
The value increases as soon as the i.t model is effective. When reaching 100%, the inverter switches
off with "I.t_trp".
P0-67
11228
Fieldbus torque setpoint/
limit value
Internal value
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P0-57
9
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
113
9
Parameters
Overview of parameters
ParaSEW in- Modbus Description
meters
dex
register
P0-68
11229
Display range
User ramp value
Explanation
The indicating accuracy on the inverter display depends on the ramp time received via the fieldbus.
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
Ramp <0.1 s: Display with 2 decimal positions
0.1 s ≤ ramp <10 s: Display with 1 decimal position
10 s ≤ ramp <65 s: Display with 0 decimal positions
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
• 400 V: 15 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
0.0 s ≤ ramp <10 s: Display with 1 decimal position
10 s ≤ ramp <65 s: Display with 0 decimal positions
P0-69
11230
Counter for I2C faults
0 ~ 65535
P0-70
11231
Module identification code
List
PL-HFA: HIPERFACE® encoder module
PL-Enc: Encoder module
PL-EIO: IO expansion module
PL-BUS: HMS fieldbus module
PL-UnF: no module connected
PL-UnA: unknown module connected
Fieldbus module ID / fieldbus module status
List / value
N.A.: no fieldbus module connected.
Prof-b: PROFIBUS module connected.
dE-nEt: DeviceNet™ module connected.
Eth-IP: EtherNet/IP™ module connected.
CAN-OP: CANopen module connected.
SErCOS: Sercos-III module connected.
bAc-nt: BACnet module connected.
nu-nEt: Module of a new type (not detected).
Eth-cAt: EtherCAT® module connected.
PrF-nEt: PROFINET module connected.
Po-Lin: PowerLink module connected.
Modbus: Modbus TCP module connected.
Process temperature
Room temperature
C
42 = 42 °C
P0-72
11232
P0-73
11354
Encoder status / error
Internal value
codes
For incremental encoders:
1=EnC-04 Signal A/A error
2=EnC-05 Signal B/B error
3=EnC-06 Signal A+B error
For LTX HIPERFACE® encoders:
Bit 0=EnC-04 analog signal
error (sin/cos)
Bit 1=EnC-07 RS485 communication error
Bit 2=EnC-08 IO communication error
Bit 3=EnC-09 encoder type
not supported
Bit 4=EnC-10 KTY error
Bit 5=incorrect motor combination
Bit 6=system referenced
Bit 7=system ready
P0-74
L1 input voltage
P0-75
L2 input voltage
P0-76
P0-77
P0-78
114
39
11262
11263
Displayed as decimal value.
L3 input voltage
Internal value
Position feedback
Internal value
Position feedback
11262: High word
11263: Low word
Position reference
Internal value
Position reference
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P0-71
Parameters
Overview of parameters
ParaSEW in- Modbus Description
meters
dex
register
Display range
Explanation
P0-79
11355,
11356
IO version and DSP bootloader version for motor
control
Example: L 1.00
Example: b 1.00
2 entries; first for lib version of the motor control,
second for DSP bootloader version.
2 decimal positions.
P0-80
11233,
11357
Code for valid motor data
Servo module version
9
22872051/EN – 09/2016
2 entries; first value is 1 if valid servomotor data is
read via the LTX module.
Second value is the SW version of the LTX card.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
115
9
Parameters
Overview of parameters
9.1.2
Parameter register
The following table lists all parameters together with their factory settings (indicated in bold). Numerical values are displayed with the complete setting
range.
Modbus
register
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
Range/factory setting
101
11020
"P1-01 Maximum speed" (→ 2 122)
P1-02 – 50.0 Hz – 5 × P1-09
102
11021
"P1-02 Minimum speed" (→ 2 122)
0 – P1-01 Hz
103
11022
"P1-03 Acceleration ramp time" (→ 2 122)
IP20
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
IP66
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
0.00 – 5.0 – 600 s
• 575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
0.00 – 5.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
• 400 V: 15 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
0.0 – 5.0 – 6000 s
• 400 V: 11 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 15 – 110 kW
0.0 – 5.0 – 6000 s
IP20
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
IP66
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
coast/0.01 – 5.0 – 600 s
• 575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
coast/0.01 – 5.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
• 400 V: 15 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
• 400 V: 11 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 15 – 110 kW
104
11023
"P1-04 Deceleration ramp time" (→ 2 123)
coast/0.1 – 5.0 – 6000 s
coast/0.1 – 5.0 – 6000 s
105
11024
"P1-05 Stop mode" (→ 2 123)
0: Stop ramp / 1: Coast to a stop
106
11025
"P1-06 Energy saving function" (→ 2 123)
0: off / 1: on
107
11012
"P1-07 Rated motor voltage" (→ 2 124)
• 230 V inverter: 20 – 230 − 250 V
• 400 V inverter: 20 – 400 – 500 V
108
11015
"P1-08 Rated motor current" (→ 2 124)
20 − 100% of the inverter current
109
11009
"P1-09 Rated motor frequency" (→ 2 124)
25 – 50/60 – 500 Hz
110
11026
"P1-10 Rated motor speed" (→ 2 124)
0 – 30000 1/min
111
11027
"P1-11 Voltage increase, boost" (→ 2 125)
0 – 30% (factory setting depends on inverter)
112
11028
"P1-12 Control signal source" (→ 2 125)
0: Terminal mode
113
11029
"P1-13 Error history" (→ 2 126)
Last 4 errors
114
11030
"P1-14 Extended parameter access" (→ 2 126) 0 – 30000
115
11031
"P1-15 Digital input function
selection" (→ 2 126)
0 – 1 – 26
116
11006
"P1-16 Motor type" (→ 2 130)
In-Syn
117
11032
"P1-17 Servo module function
selection" (→ 2 131)
0–1–8
118
11033
"P1-18 Motor thermistor selection" (→ 2 131)
0: Inhibited
119
11105
"P1-19 Inverter address" (→ 2 131)
0 – 1 – 63
120
11106
"P1-20 SBus baud rate" (→ 2 131)
125, 250, 500, 1000 kBaud
121
11017
"P1-21 Stiffness" (→ 2 131)
0.50 – 1.00 – 2.00
122
11034
"P1-22 Motor load inertia ratio" (→ 2 131)
0 – 1 – 30
201
11036
"P2-01 Fixed setpoint speed 1" (→ 2 132)
-P1-01 – 5.0 Hz – P1-01
202
11037
"P2-02 Fixed setpoint speed 2" (→ 2 132)
-P1-01 – 10.0 Hz – P1-01
203
11038
"P2-03 Fixed setpoint speed 3" (→ 2 132)
-P1-01 – 25.0 Hz – P1-01
116
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
• 575 V inverter: 20 – 575 – 600 V
Parameters
Overview of parameters
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Modbus
register
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
9
Range/factory setting
204
11039
"P2-04 Fixed setpoint speed 4" (→ 2 132)
-P1-01 – 50.0 Hz – P1-01
205
11040
"P2-05 Fixed setpoint speed 5" (→ 2 132)
-P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
206
11041
"P2-06 Fixed setpoint speed 6" (→ 2 133)
-P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
207
11042
"P2-07 Fixed setpoint speed 7" (→ 2 133)
/brake release speed
-P1-01 − 0.0 Hz − P1-01
208
11043
"P2-08 Fixed setpoint speed 8" (→ 2 133)
/brake application speed
-P1-01 − 0.0 Hz − P1-01
209
11044
"P2-09 Skip frequency" (→ 2 133)
P1-02 – P1-01
210
11045
"P2-10 Skip frequency range" (→ 2 133)
0.0 Hz – P1-01
211
11046
"P2-11 Analog output 1 function
selection" (→ 2 134)
0 – 8 – 13
212
11047
"P2-12 Analog output 1 format" (→ 2 134)
0 – 10 V
213
11048
"P2-13 Analog output 2 function
selection" (→ 2 134)
0 – 9 – 13
214
11049
"P2-14 Analog output 2 format" (→ 2 134)
0 – 10 V
215
11050
"P2-15 User relay output 1 function
selection" (→ 2 135)
0 – 1 – 11
216
11051
"P2-16 Upper limit of user relay 1: Analog
output 1" (→ 2 135)
0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0 %
217
11052
"P2-17 Lower limit of user relay 1: Analog
output 1" (→ 2 135)
0.0 – P2-16
218
11053
"P2-18 User relay output 2 function
selection" (→ 2 136)
0 – 3 – 11
219
11054
"P2-19 Upper limit of user relay 2: Analog
output 2" (→ 2 136)
0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0 %
220
11055
"P2-20 Lower limit of user relay 2: Analog
output 2" (→ 2 136)
0.0 – P2-19
221
11056
"P2-21 Display scaling factor" (→ 2 136)
-30000 – 0,000 – 30000
222
11057
"P2-22 Display scaling source" (→ 2 136)
0−2
223
11058
"P2-23 Zero speed holding time" (→ 2 136)
0.0 – 0.2 – 60.0 s
224
11003
"P2-24 PWM switching frequency" (→ 2 136)
2 – 16 kHz (depends on inverter)
225
11059
"P2-25 Second deceleration ramp, rapid stop
ramp" (→ 2 137)
IP20
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
IP66
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
coast/0.01 – 2.0 – 600 s
• 575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
coast/0.01 – 2.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
For the inverters:
• 230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
• 400 V: 15 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
coast/0.1 – 2.0 – 6000 s
• 400 V: 11 – 160 kW
• 575 V: 15 – 110 kW
coast/0.1 – 2.0 – 6000 s
226
11060
"P2-26 Flying start enable" (→ 2 137)
0: Disabled
227
11061
"P2-27 Standby mode" (→ 2 137)
0.0 – 250 s
228
11062
"P2-28 Slave speed scaling" (→ 2 138)
0: Disabled
229
11063
"P2-29 Slave speed scaling factor" (→ 2 138)
-500 – 100 – 500 %
230
11064
"P2-30 Analog input 1 format" (→ 2 138)
0 – 10 V
231
11065
"P2-31 Analog input 1 scaling" (→ 2 139)
0 – 100 – 500 %
232
11066
"P2-32 Analog input 1 offset" (→ 2 139)
-500 – 0 – 500 %
233
11067
"P2-33 Analog input 2 format / motor
protection" (→ 2 140)
0 – 10 V
234
11068
"P2-34 Analog input 2 scaling" (→ 2 140)
0 – 100 – 500 %
235
11069
"P2-35 Analog input 2 offset" (→ 2 140)
-500 – 0 – 500 %
236
11070
"P2-36 Start mode selection" (→ 2 140)
Auto – 0
237
11071
"P2-37 Keypad restart speed" (→ 2 141)
0–7
238
11072
"P2-38 Mains loss stop control" (→ 2 142)
0–3
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
117
Overview of parameters
Modbus
register
118
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
Range/factory setting
239
11073
"P2-39 Parameter lock" (→ 2 142)
0: Disabled
240
11074
"P2-40 Extended parameter access code
definition" (→ 2 142)
0 – 101 – 9999
301
11075
"P3-01 PID proportional gain" (→ 2 142)
0 – 1 – 30
302
11076
"P3-02 PID integral time constant" (→ 2 142)
0 – 1 – 30 s
303
11077
"P3-03 PID differential time
constant" (→ 2 143)
0.00 – 1.00 s
304
11078
"P3-04 PID operating mode" (→ 2 143)
0: Direct operation
305
11079
"P3-05 PID reference selection" (→ 2 143)
0: Fixed setpoint reference
306
11080
"P3-06 PID fixed setpoint reference
1" (→ 2 143)
0.0 – 100.0%
307
11081
"P3-07 PID controller upper limit" (→ 2 143)
P3-08 – 100.0%
308
11082
"P3-08 PID controller lower limit" (→ 2 143)
0.0 % – P3-07
309
11083
"P3-09 PID correcting variable
limitation" (→ 2 143)
0: Fixed setpoint reference
310
11084
"P3-10 PID feedback selection" (→ 2 144)
0: Analog input 2
311
11085
"P3-11 PID ramp activation error" (→ 2 144)
0.0 – 25.0%
312
11086
"P3-12 PID actual value display scaling
factor" (→ 2 144)
0.0 – 50000
313
11087
"P3-13 PID feedback wake-up level" (→ 2 144) 0.0 – 100.0%
314
11088
"P3-14 PID fixed setpoint speed 2" (→ 2 144)
0.0 – 100.0%
315
11376
"P3-15 PID fixed setpoint speed 3" (→ 2 144)
0.0 – 100.0%
316
11377
"P3-16 PID fixed setpoint speed 4" (→ 2 144)
0.0 – 100.0%
401
11089
"P4-01 Control mode" (→ 2 145)
2: Speed control – Enhanced V/f
402
11090
"P4-02 "Auto tune"" (→ 2 146)
0: Inhibited
403
11091
"P4-03 Speed controller proportional
gain" (→ 2 146)
0.1 – 50 – 400 %
404
11092
"P4-04 Speed controller integral time
constant" (→ 2 146)
0,001 – 0,100 – 1,000 s
405
11093
"P4-05 Motor power factor" (→ 2 146)
0.50 – 0.99 (depends on inverter)
406
11094
"P4-06 Torque reference/limit value
source" (→ 2 146)
0: Fixed torque reference/limit value
407
11095
"P4-07 Max. motor torque limit" (→ 2 148)
P4-08 – 200 – 500%
408
11096
"P4-08 Min. torque limit" (→ 2 149)
0.0% – P4-07
409
11097
"P4-09 Max. regenerative torque
limit" (→ 2 149)
P4-08 – 200 – 500%
410
11098
"P4-10 V/f characteristic adjustment
frequency" (→ 2 150)
0.0 – 100.0 % of P1-09
411
11099
"P4-11 V/f characteristic adjustment
voltage" (→ 2 150)
0.0 – 100.0 % of P1-07
412
11100
"P4-12 Motor brake control" (→ 2 150)
0: Disabled
413
11101
"P4-13 Brake release time" (→ 2 150)
0.0 – 5.0 s
414
11102
"P4-14 Brake application time" (→ 2 150)
0.0 – 5.0 s
415
11103
"P4-15 Torque threshold for brake
release" (→ 2 151)
0.0 – 200%
416
11104
"P4-16 Hoist torque threshold
timeout" (→ 2 151)
0.0 – 25.0 s
417
11357
"P4-17 Thermal motor protection to
UL508C" (→ 2 151)
0: Disabled
501
11105
"P5-01 Inverter address" (→ 2 151)
0 – 1 – 63
502
11106
"P5-02 SBus baud rate/CANopen" (→ 2 151)
125 − 500 − 1000 kBd
503
11107
"P5-03 Modbus RTU baud rate" (→ 2 152)
9.6 − 115.2 / 115200 Bd
504
11108
"P5-04 Modbus RTU data format" (→ 2 152)
n-1: no parity, 1 stop bit
505
11109
"P5-05 Response to communication
failure" (→ 2 152)
2: Stop ramp (without fault)
506
11110
"P5-06 Communication failure timeout for SBus 0.0 – 1.0 – 5.0 s
and Modbus" (→ 2 152)
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
9
Parameters
Parameters
Overview of parameters
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Modbus
register
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
9
Range/factory setting
507
11111
"P5-07 Ramp specified via fieldbus" (→ 2 152) 0: Disabled
508
11112
"P5-08 Synchronization duration" (→ 2 152)
0, 5 – 20 ms
509
11369
"P5-09 Fieldbus PO2 definition" (→ 2 153)
0−7
510
11370
"P5-10 Fieldbus PO3 definition" (→ 2 153)
0−7
511
11371
"P5-11 Fieldbus PO4 definition" (→ 2 153)
0−7
512
11372
"P5-12 Fieldbus PI2 definition" (→ 2 154)
0 − 11
513
11373
"P5-13 Fieldbus PI3 definition" (→ 2 154)
0 − 11
514
11374
"P5-14 Fieldbus PI4 definition" (→ 2 154)
0 − 11
515
11360
"P5-15 Expansion relay 3 function
selection" (→ 2 154)
0 − 10
516
11361
"P5-16 Relay 3 upper limit" (→ 2 154)
0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
517
11362
"P5-17 Relay 3 lower limit" (→ 2 155)
0.0 – 200.0%
518
11363
"P5-18 Expansion relay 4 function
selection" (→ 2 155)
see P5-15
519
11364
"P5-19 Relay 4 upper limit" (→ 2 155)
0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
520
11365
"P5-20 Relay 4 lower limit" (→ 2 155)
0.0 – 200.0%
601
11115
"P6-01 Firmware upgrade enable" (→ 2 155)
0: Disabled
602
11116
"P6-02 Automatic thermal
management" (→ 2 155)
1: Enabled
603
11117
"P6-03 Auto-reset delay time" (→ 2 156)
1 – 20 – 60 s
604
11118
"P6-04 Hysteresis band user relay" (→ 2 156) 0.0 – 0.3 – 25.0%
605
11119
"P6-05 Encoder feedback enable" (→ 2 156)
0: Disabled
606
11120
"P6-06 Encoder PPR" (→ 2 156)
0 – 65535 PPR
607
11121
"P6-07 Trigger threshold speed error/speed
monitoring" (→ 2 156)
1.0 – 5.0 – 100%
608
11122
"P6-08 Max. frequency for speed
setpoint" (→ 2 156)
0; 5 – 20 kHz
609
11123
"P6-09 Droop speed/load distribution
control" (→ 2 157)
0.0 – 25.0%
610
11124
"P6-10 Reserved" (→ 2 157)
611
11125
"P6-11 Speed holding time on enable (fixed
setpoint speed 7)" (→ 2 157)
0.0 – 250 s
612
11126
"P6-12 Speed holding time on inhibit (fixed
setpoint speed 8)" (→ 2 157)
0.0 – 250 s
613
11127
"P6-13 Fire mode logic/emergency
mode" (→ 2 158)
0: Open trigger: Fire mode
614
11128
"P6-14 Fire mode/emergency mode
speed" (→ 2 158)
-P1-01 – 0 – P1-01 Hz
615
11129
"P6-15 Analog output 1 scaling" (→ 2 158)
0.0 – 100.0 – 500.0%
616
11130
"P6-16 Analog output 1 offset" (→ 2 158)
-500.0 – 0.0 – 500.0%
617
11131
"P6-17 Max. torque limit timeout" (→ 2 159)
0.0 – 0.5 − 25.0 s
618
11132
"P6-18 DC braking voltage level" (→ 2 159)
Auto, 0.0 – 30.0%
619
11133
"P6-19 Braking resistor value" (→ 2 159)
0, Min-R – 200 Ω
620
11134
"P6-20 Braking resistor power" (→ 2 159)
0.0 – 200 kW
621
11135
"P6-21 Brake chopper operating cycle at
undertemperature" (→ 2 160)
0.0 – 20.0%
622
11136
"P6-22 Reset fan runtime" (→ 2 160)
0: Disabled
623
11137
"P6-23 Reset kWh meter" (→ 2 160)
0: Disabled
624
11138
"P6-24 Parameter default settings" (→ 2 160)
0: Disabled
625
11139
"P6-25 Access code level 3" (→ 2 160)
0 – 201 – 9 999
626
11378
"P6-26 Parameter backup" (→ 2 160)
0: Basic setting of the parameter
701
11140
"P7-01 Motor stator resistance (Rs)" (→ 2 161) depending on the motor
702
11141
"P7-02 Motor rotor resistance (Rr)" (→ 2 161)
depending on the motor
703
11142
"P7-03 Motor stator inductance
(Lsd)" (→ 2 161)
depending on the motor
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
119
Overview of parameters
Modbus
register
120
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
Range/factory setting
704
11143
"P7-04 Motor magnetization current (Id
rms)" (→ 2 162)
10% × P1-08 − 80% × P1-08
705
11144
"P7-05 Motor leakage loss coefficient
(sigma)" (→ 2 162)
0,025 – 0.10 – 0.25
706
11145
"P7-06 Motor stator inductance (Lsq) − only for depending on the motor
synchronous motors" (→ 2 162)
707
11146
"P7-07 Enhanced generator control" (→ 2 162) 0: Disabled
708
11147
"P7-08 Parameter adjustment" (→ 2 162)
0: Disabled
709
11148
"P7-09 Overvoltage current limit" (→ 2 162)
0.0 – 1.0 – 100%
710
11149
"P7-10 Stiffness (for vector control)" (→ 2 163) 0 – 10 – 600
711
11150
"P7-11 Pulse width min. limit" (→ 2 163)
0 – 500
712
11151
"P7-12 Premagnetization time" (→ 2 163)
0 – 5000 ms
713
11152
"P7-13 D-gain vector speed
controller" (→ 2 163)
0.0 – 400%
714
11153
"P7-14 Low-frequency torque boost/
premagnetization current" (→ 2 163)
0.0 – 100%
715
11154
"P7-15 Torque boost frequency
limit" (→ 2 164)
0.0 – 50%
716
11155
"P7-16 Motor nameplate speed" (→ 2 164)
0.0 – 6000 1/min
801
11156
"P8-01 Simulated encoder scaling" (→ 2 164)
20 – 23
802
11157
"P8-02 Input pulse scaling value" (→ 2 164)
20 – 216
803
11158
"P8-03 Lag error low word" (→ 2 165)
0 – 65535
804
11159
"P8-04 Lag error high word" (→ 2 165)
0 – 65535
805
11160
"P8-05 Reference travel type" (→ 2 165)
0: Disabled
806
11161
"P8-06 Position controller proportional
gain" (→ 2 165)
0.0 – 1.0 – 400%
807
11162
"P8-07 Touch probe trigger mode" (→ 2 165)
0: TP1 P edge TP2 P edge
808
11163
"P8-08 Reserved" (→ 2 165)
809
11164
"P8-09 Velocity precontrol gain" (→ 2 165)
810
11165
"P8-10 Acceleration precontrol gain" (→ 2 166) 0 – 400%
811
11166
"P8-11 Reference offset low word" (→ 2 166)
812
11167
"P8-12 Reference offset high word" (→ 2 166) 0 – 65535
813
11168
"P8-13 Reserved" (→ 2 166)
814
11169
"P8-14 Reference enable torque" (→ 2 166)
0 – 100 – 500%
901
11171
"P9-01 Enable input source" (→ 2 168)
SAFE, din-1 – din-8
902
11172
"P9-02 Rapid stop input source" (→ 2 168)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
903
11173
"P9-03 Input source for clockwise rotation
(CW)" (→ 2 168)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
904
11174
"P9-04 Input source for counterclockwise
rotation (CCW)" (→ 2 168)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
905
11175
"P9-05 Latch function enable" (→ 2 168)
OFF, ON
906
11176
"P9-06 Direction of rotation
reversal" (→ 2 168)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
907
11177
"P9-07 Reset input source" (→ 2 168)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
908
11178
"P9-08 External fault input source" (→ 2 169)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
909
11179
"P9-09 Terminal control enable
source" (→ 2 169)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
910
11180
"P9-10 Speed source 1" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
911
11181
"P9-11 Speed source 2" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
912
11182
"P9-12 Speed source 3" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
913
11183
"P9-13 Speed source 4" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
914
11184
"P9-14 Speed source 5" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
915
11185
"P9-15 Speed source 6" (→ 2 169)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
916
11186
"P9-16 Speed source 7" (→ 2 170)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
917
11187
"P9-17 Speed source 8" (→ 2 170)
Ain-1, Ain-2, speed 1–8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus, user, pulse
918
11188
"P9-18 Input speed selection 0" (→ 2 170)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
0 – 100 – 400%
0 – 65535
22872051/EN – 09/2016
9
Parameters
Parameters
Overview of parameters
Modbus
register
SBus/ Associated parameter
CANopen
index
9
Range/factory setting
11189
"P9-19 Input speed selection 1" (→ 2 170)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
920
11190
"P9-20 Input speed selection 2" (→ 2 170)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
921
11191
"P9-21 Fixed setpoint speed selection input
0" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
922
11192
"P9-22 Fixed setpoint speed selection input
1" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
923
11193
"P9-23 Fixed setpoint speed selection input
2" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8, On
924
11194
"P9-24 Positive jog mode input" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
925
11195
"P9-25 Negative jog mode input" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
926
11196
"P9-26 Reference travel enable
input" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
927
11197
"P9-27 Reference cam input" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
928
11198
"P9-28 Motor potentiometer up input
source" (→ 2 171)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
929
11199
"P9-29 Motor potentiometer down input
source" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
930
11200
"P9-30 Positive limit switch CW" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
931
11201
"P9-31 Negative limit switch CCW" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
932
11202
"P9-32 Enable second deceleration ramp, rapid OFF, din-1 – din-8
stop ramp" (→ 2 172)
933
11203
"P9-33 Fire mode/emergency mode input
selection" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-5
934
11204
"P9-34 PID fixed setpoint reference selection
input 0" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
935
11205
"P9-35 PID fixed setpoint reference selection
input 1" (→ 2 172)
OFF, din-1 – din-8
22872051/EN – 09/2016
919
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
121
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9.2
Explanation of the parameters
9.2.1
Parameter group 1: Basic parameters (level 1)
P1-01 Maximum speed
Setting range: P1-02 – 50.0 Hz – 5 × P1-09 (max. 500 Hz)
Specifies the upper limit for the frequency (speed) that can be applied to the motor in
any operating mode. This parameter is displayed in Hz in factory default state or when
the parameter for the rated motor speed (P1-10) is set to zero. If the rated motor
speed was entered in rpm in P1-10, this parameter will be displayed in rpm.
The maximum speed is also limited by the switching frequency set in P2-24. The limit
is determined by the maximum output frequency to the motor = P2-24: 16.
P1-02 Minimum speed
Setting range: 0 – P1-01 Hz
Specifies the lower limit for the frequency (speed) that can be applied to the motor in
any operating mode. This parameter is displayed in Hz in factory default state or when
the parameter for the rated motor speed (P1-10) is set to zero. If the rated motor
speed was entered in rpm in P1-10, this parameter will be displayed in rpm.
The speed drops below this limit only when the inverter enable signal is removed and
the inverter decreases the output frequency to zero.
P1-03 Acceleration ramp time
Setting range:
For the inverters:
IP20
IP66
•
230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
•
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
0.00 – 5.0 – 600 s
0.00 – 5.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
IP66
•
230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
•
230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
•
400 V: 15 – 160 kW
•
400 V: 11 – 160 kW
•
575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
•
575 V: 15 – 110 kW
0.0 – 5.0 – 6000 s
0.0 – 5.0 – 6000 s
Specifies the time in seconds during which the output frequency (speed) increases
from 0 to 50 Hz. Note that the ramp time is not affected by changing either the maximum or minimum speed limit. The reason is that the ramp time refers to 50 Hz, not to
the speed P1-01 / P1-02.
122
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
IP20
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P1-04 Deceleration ramp time
Setting range:
For the inverters:
IP20
IP66
•
230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
•
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
Coast – 0.01 – 5.0 – 600 s
Coast – 0.01 – 5.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
IP20
IP66
•
230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
•
230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
•
400 V: 15 – 160 kW
•
400 V: 11 – 160 kW
•
575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
•
575 V: 15 – 110 kW
Coast – 0.1 – 5.0 – 6000 s
Coast – 0.1 – 5.0 – 6000 s
Specifies the time in seconds during which the output frequency (speed) decreases
from 50 to 0 Hz. Note that the ramp time is not affected by changing either the maximum or minimum speed limit. The reason is that the ramp time refers to 50 Hz, not to
P1-01 / P1-02.
A ramp of 0 s is displayed as "coast" as this value leads to coast to a stop.
P1-05 Stop mode
•
0: Stop ramp: The speed is decreased to zero along the ramp set in P1-04 when
the inverter enable signal is removed. The output stage is only inhibited when the
output frequency is zero. If a zero speed holding time is set in P2-23, the inverter
will hold zero speed during this time before it is disabled.
•
1: Coast to a stop: In this case, the inverter output is disabled as soon as the enable signal is removed. The motor then coasts to stop in a non-controlled manner.
P1-06 Energy saving function
•
0: Off
•
1: On
22872051/EN – 09/2016
If this function is activated, the inverter continuously monitors the motor load condition
by comparing the output current with the nominal motor current. If the motor rotates
with a constant speed in the partial load range, the inverter automatically reduces the
output voltage, thus reducing the motor's energy consumption. If the motor load increases or the frequency setpoint changes, the output voltage increases immediately.
The energy-saving function works only if the inverter setpoint remains constant over a
certain period of time.
Application examples include, for example, fan applications or conveyor belts for
which the energy requirement in the range between full, empty or partial load trips is
optimized.
This function is only applicable for asynchronous motors.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
123
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P1-07 Rated motor voltage
Setting range:
•
230 V inverter: 20 – 230 − 250 V
•
400 V inverter: 20 – 400 – 500 V
•
575 V inverter: 20 – 575 – 600 V
Specifies the nominal voltage of the motor connected to the inverter (in accordance
with the motor nameplate). The parameter value is used in V/f speed control for controlling the output voltage applied to the motor. In V/f speed control, the output voltage
of the inverter amounts to the value set in P1-07 if the output speed corresponds to
the motor base frequency set in P1-09.
"0V" = DC link compensation is disabled. When braking, the V/f ratio shifts as a result
of the voltage increase in the DC link, resulting in greater motor losses. The motor
heats up more. The additional motor losses during braking might make a braking resistor redundant.
P1-08 Rated motor current
Setting range: 20 – 100% of the inverter output current. Is given as absolute value in
ampere.
Specifies the rated current of the motor connected to the inverter (according to the
motor nameplate). This allows the inverter to match its internal thermal motor protection (I x t protection) to the motor.
If the inverter output current is > 100% of the nominal motor current, the inverter
switches off the motor after a certain amount of time (I.-trP) before there is any
thermal damage to the motor.
P1-09 Rated motor frequency
Setting range: 25 – 50/601) – 500 Hz
Specifies the rated frequency of the motor connected to the inverter (according to the
motor nameplate). This is the frequency at which the maximum (rated) output voltage
is applied to the motor. Above this frequency, the voltage applied to the motor remains
constant at its maximum value.
1) 60 Hz (only American version)
P1-10 Rated motor speed
Setting range: 0 – 30 000 1/min
Specifies the rated speed of the motor. When the parameter is ≠ 0, all speed-related
parameters, such as minimum and maximum speed are displayed in "rpm".
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The slip compensation is activated at the same time. The frequency or speed shown
on the display of the inverter corresponds to the calculated rotor frequency or rotor
speed.
124
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P1-11 Voltage increase, boost
Setting range: Auto / 0 – 30% (default value depends on inverter voltage and power
rating)
Determines the voltage increase at low speeds in order to facilitate the removal of applied loads. Modifies the V/f limit values by ½ P1-07 and ½ P1-09.
UP1-07
P1-07
2
20 %
10 %
0%
P1-09
2
P1-09
f
18014401443350923
For the "Auto" setting, a value based on the motor data measured during auto tune is
set automatically.
P1-12 Control signal source
The user can use this parameter to determine whether the inverter is controlled by the:
•
User terminals
•
Keypad at the front of the device
•
Internal PID controller
•
Fieldbus
22872051/EN – 09/2016
See also chapter "Startup of control" (→ 2 65).
•
0: Terminal mode
•
1: Keypad mode unipolar
•
2: Keypad mode bipolar
•
3: PID controller mode
•
4: Master-slave operation
•
5: SBus MOVILINK®
•
6: CANopen
•
7: Fieldbus, Modbus, communication option
•
8: MultiMotion
INFORMATION
As soon as you use a communication option or an encoder card in the option card
slot, communication via Modbus is no longer possible.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
125
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P1-13 Error history
Includes the 4 most recent faults and/or events that have occurred. Each fault is displayed with abbreviated text. The most recent fault is displayed first. When a new fault
occurs, it will be entered at the top of the list. All other faults are shifted downwards.
The oldest fault will be deleted from the error history. Undervoltage faults are only
archived if the inverter is enabled. If the inverter is separated from the supply system
without enable, no undervoltage fault is archived.
P1-14 Extended parameter access
Setting range: 0 – 30000
This parameter allows users to access parameter groups other than the basic parameters (parameters P1-01 – P1-15). Access is possible when the following values are
valid.
•
0: P1-01 – P1-15 (basis parameter)
•
1: P1-01 – P1-22 (basis + servo parameter)
•
101: P0-01 – P5-20 (extended parameters)
•
201: P0-01 – P9-33 (extended parameter menu → full access)
P1-15 Digital input function selection
Setting range: 0 – 1 – 26
Users can set the function of the digital inputs of the inverter, that is the user can select functions required for the application.
The following tables list the functions of the digital inputs depending on the value set in
parameters P1-12 (terminal/keypad/SBus control) and P1-15 (selection of the digital
input functions).
INFORMATION
Individual configuration of digital inputs:
To individually configure the digital input assignment, set parameter P1-15 to "0".
This setting means that the input terminals for DI1 – DI5 (with LTX option DI1 – DI8)
are set to "no function".
P1-15 Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Analog input 1: Di- Analog input 2: Di- Remarks / preset
gital input 4
gital input 5
value
0
No function
P9-xx
No function
P9-xx
No function
P9-xx
No function
P9-xx
1
0: Stop (controller 0: Clockwise rotainhibit)
tion
1: Start (enable)
1: Counterclockwise rotation
No function
P9-xx
–
22872051/EN – 09/2016
0: Selected speed Analog 1 speed set- 0: Fixed setpoint
setpoint
point
speed 1
1: Fixed setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1, 2
speed 2
Configuration via
parameter group P9xx.
126
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P1-15 Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Analog input 1: Di- Analog input 2: Di- Remarks / preset
gital input 4
gital input 5
value
2
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Open
0: Open
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
1
1: Closed
0: Open
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
2
0: Open
1: Closed
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Closed
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
5
1: Closed
0: Open
1: Closed
Fixed setpoint speed
6
0: Open
1: Closed
1: Closed
Fixed setpoint speed
7
1: Closed
1: Closed
1: Closed
Fixed setpoint speed
8
3
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- Analog torque refer- –
point
ence
Set P4-06 = 2 here.
4
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- 0: Decel. ramp 1
point
1: Decel. ramp 2
5
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Analog input 2
Analog 1 Speed set- Analog 2 speed set- –
point
point
6
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- External fault1)
point
0: Error
1: Start
7
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
2
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
8
9
22872051/EN – 09/2016
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
External fault1)
0: Error
1: Start
0: Decel. ramp 1
1: Decel. ramp 2
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1 – 4
10
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start (enable)
0: Clockwise rotation
1: CCW rotation
N.O. contact
The speed increases when closing.
N.O. contact
The speed decreases when closing.
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
11
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1, 2
Analog 1 speed set- 0: Fixed setpoint
point
speed 1
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 2
9
–
–
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
2
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
2
–
–
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
127
Explanation of the parameters
P1-15 Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Analog input 1: Di- Analog input 2: Di- Remarks / preset
gital input 4
gital input 5
value
12
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Open
0: Open
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
1
1: Applied
0: Open
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
2
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
5
1: Applied
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
6
0: Open
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
7
1: Applied
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
8
13
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- Analog torque refer- –
point
ence
Set P4-06 = 2 here.
14
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- 0: Decel. ramp 1
point
1: Decel. ramp 2
15
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Analog input 2
Analog 1 speed set- Analog 2 speed set- –
point
point
16
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Analog 1 speed set- External fault1)
point
0: Error
1: Start
17
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
Fixed setpoint speed
2
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
0: Open
0: Open
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
3
1: Applied
1: Applied
Fixed setpoint speed
4
N.O. contact
The speed decreases when closing.
18
19
128
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
20
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CW rotation
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: CCW rotation
N.O. contact
The speed increases when closing.
21
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Clockwise rotation (latching)
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Start
0: Stop (controller Analog 1 speed setinhibit)
point
1: Counterclockwise
rotation (latching)
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
External fault1)
0: Error
1: Start
0: Decel. ramp 1
1: Decel. ramp 2
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1 – 4
–
–
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
2
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
1
Fixed setpoint speed
2
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Used for motor potentiometer operation.
0: Selected speed
setpoint
1: Fixed setpoint
speed 1
Function enabled if
P1‑12 = 0
22872051/EN – 09/2016
9
Parameters
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P1-15 Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Analog input 1: Di- Analog input 2: Di- Remarks / preset
gital input 4
gital input 5
value
22
0: Normal mode
1: Reference cam
0: Normal mode
1: Jog speed +
0: Normal mode
1: Jog speed –
Speed setpoint
0: Normal mode
1: Reference travel
start
Only in combination
with LTX encoder
card
23
0: Normal mode
1: Reference cam
0: Limit switch +
1: Normal mode
0: Limit switch –
1: Normal mode
Speed setpoint
0: Normal mode
1: Reference travel
start
Only in combination
with LTX encoder
card
24
0: Controller inhibit 0: Normal mode
1: Enable
1: Jog speed +
0: Normal mode
1: Jog speed –
Speed setpoint
0: Normal mode
1: Reference cam
Only in combination
with LTX encoder
card
25
0: Controller inhibit 0: Limit switch +
1: Enable
1: Normal mode
0: Limit switch –
1: Normal mode
Speed setpoint
0: Normal mode
1: Reference cam
Only in combination
with LTX encoder
card
26
0: Stop (controller
inhibit)
1: Enable
No function
Speed setpoint
Speed setpoint
Only in combination
with LTX encoder
card
No function
9
1) The external fault is defined in parameter P2-33.
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
When using a TF/TH, KTY or PT1000, set P2-33 to PTC-th, KTY or PT1000. Also observe the connection information in chapter "Motor temperature protection TF, TH,
KTY84, PT1000" (→ 2 32).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
129
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9.2.2
Parameter group 1: Servo-specific parameters (level 1)
P1-16 Motor type
Setting the motor type:
In-Syn
Syn
Motor type
Explanation
Induction motor
Default setting. Do not change if none of the selection options match.
Choose induction motor or permanent magnet motor in parameter P4-01.
Undefined servomotor Undefined servomotor. You must set special servo parameters during startup. In this case,
you have to set P4-01 to synchronous motor control.
40M 2
40M 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP40M
40M 2b
40M 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP40M with brake
50S 2
50S 4
230 V / 400V
CMP50S
50S 2b
50S 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP50S with brake
50M 2
50M 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP50M
50M 2b
50M 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP50M with brake
50L 2
50L 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP50L
50L 2b
50L 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP50L with brake
63S 2
63S 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP63S
63S 2b
63S 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP63S with brake
63M 2
63M 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP63M
63M 2b
63M 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP63M with brake
63L 2
63L 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP63L
63L 2b
63L 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP63L with brake
71S 2
71S 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP71S
71S 2b
71S 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP71S with brake
71M 2
71M 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP71M
71M 2b
71M 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP71M with brake
71L 2
71L 4
230 V / 400 V
CMP71L
71L 2b
71L 4b
230 V / 400 V
CMP71L with brake
gf-2
MGF..2-DSM
gf-4
MGF..4-DSM
gf-4Ht
MGF..4/XT-DSM
Preset CMP motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE. Selecting one of those motor types will automatically set all the motor-specific parameters. The overload behavior is set to 200% for 60 s
and 250% for 2 s.
Only motor data of CMP.. motors of speed class 4500 1/min with AK0H encoder are included.
Observe the Smart Servo Package.
If a MGF..-DSM is selected, the torque limit in P4-07 is automatically set to 200%. This value
has to be adapted according to the documentation "Addendum to the Operating Instructions,
Drive Unit MGF..-DSM on LTP-B Inverter".
All necessary motor data are set automatically.
Using this parameter lets you select preset motors (CMP.. and MGF..-DSM). This
parameter is set automatically if HIPERFACE® encoder information is read-in via LTX
encoder card.
When a permanent magnet motor is connected and the drive is operating in inverter
mode, P1‑16 does not have to be changed. In this case P4-01 determines the motor
type ("auto tune" required).
130
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Display value
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
This parameter is available for the following inverters:
IP20
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
IP66
• 230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
P1-17 Servo module function selection
Setting range: 0 − 1 – 8
Determines the function of the servo module I/O. See chapter "P1-17 Servomodule
function selection" in the addendum to the MOVITRAC® LTX operating instructions.
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
P1-18 Motor thermistor selection
•
0: Inhibited
•
1: KTY
If a motor is selected via P1-16, this parameter will change to 1. Only available with
the LTX servomodule.
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
P1-19 Inverter address
Setting range: 0 − 1 – 63
Mirror parameter of P5-01. Changing P1-19 will have an immediate effect on P5-01.
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
P1-20 SBus baud rate
Setting range: 125, 250, 500, 1 000 kBd
This parameter is a mirror parameter of P5-02. Changing P1-20 will have an immediate effect on P5-02.
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
P1-21 Stiffness
Setting range: 0.50 – 1.00 – 2.00
Only if used with the LTX encoder module. Always use P7-10 in the open control loop.
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
P1-22 Motor load inertia ratio
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 30.0
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
131
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
The inertia ratio between motor and connected load can be specified in this parameter. This value can usually remain set to the default value "1.0". However, the inertia ratio is used by the control algorithm as precontrol value for CMP../synchronous
motors from P1-16 to provide the optimal torque/current for accelerating the load. This
is why the exact setting of the inertia ratio improves the response characteristics and
the dynamics of the system. For a closed control loop, the value is calculated as follows:
P1 − 22 =
Jext
J mot
9007202712688907
If you do not know the value, keep the default setting "1.0".
Only use in connection with the LTX encoder card.
9.2.3
Parameter group 2: Extended parameter setting (level 2)
P2-01 – P2-08
If parameter P1-10 is set to "0", parameters P2-01 to P2-08 can be changed in steps
of 0.1 Hz each.
If parameter P1-10 ≠ 0, the following parameters P2-01 to P2-08 can be changed in
the following steps if:
•
P1-09 ≤ 100 Hz → in 1 (rpm)
•
100 Hz < P1-09 ≤ 200 Hz → in 2 (rpm)
•
P1-09 > 200 Hz → in 4 (rpm)
Negative speeds or frequencies can also be set.
P2-01 Fixed setpoint speed 1
Setting range: -P1-01 – 5.0 Hz – P1-01
Is also used as jog speed.
P2-02 Fixed setpoint speed 2
Setting range: -P1-01 – 10.0 Hz – P1-01
P2-03 Fixed setpoint speed 3
Setting range: -P1-01 – 25.0 Hz – P1-01
P2-04 Fixed setpoint speed 4
Setting range: -P1-01 – 50.0 Hz – P1-01
Setting range: -P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
Is also used as reference travel speed.
132
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P2-05 Fixed setpoint speed 5
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P2-06 Fixed setpoint speed 6
Setting range: -P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
Is also used as reference travel speed.
P2-07 Fixed setpoint speed 7
Setting range: -P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
Used for brake release speed in hoist mode.
P2-08 Fixed setpoint speed 8
Setting range: -P1-01 – 0.0 Hz – P1-01
Used for brake application speed in hoist mode.
P2-09 Skip frequency
Setting range: P1-02 – P1-01
The skip window center and skip width are values and automatically have an effect on
positive and negative setpoints when activated. You can disable the function by setting the skip width to 0.
If the upper or lower limit values are violated, the hidden frequency band will travel
through using the ramp times set in P1-03 / P1-04.
Output speed
P2-10
P2-09
Ramps
n-setpoint
positive and negative
n-setpoint
(integrator
input)
Setpoint
(integrator
output)
9007202718207243
P2-10 Skip frequency range
Setting range: 0.0 Hz – P1-01
P2-11: P2-13 analog outputs
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Digital output mode: 0 V / 24 V
Setting
Function
Explanation
0
Inverter enabled
Logic 1 when inverter is enabled (running).
1
Inverter ok (digital)
Logic 1 when there is no inverter fault.
2
Motor operates at setpoint speed (digital)
Logic 1 when motor speed corresponds to setpoint.
3
Motor speed > 0 (digital)
Logic 1 when motor runs above 0 speed.
4
Motor speed ≥ limit value (digital)
5
Motor current ≥ limit value (digital)
Digital output enabled with level set in "User relay/analog output upper limit" and
"User relay/analog output lower limit".
6
Motor torque ≥ limit value (digital)
7
Analog input 2 ≥ limit value (digital)
13
Fieldbus/SBus (digital)
Digital output value controlled via SBus, if P1-12 = 5 (value 1 corresponds to 24 V,
all other values correspond to 0 V)
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
133
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Analog output mode: 0 – 10 V oder 0 / 4 – 20 mA
Setting
Function
Explanation
8
Motor speed (analog)
The amplitude of the analog output signal represents the motor speed. It is scaled
from 0 to the maximum speed limit defined in P1-01.
9
Motor current (analog)
10
Motor torque (analog)
The amplitude of the analog output signal represents the inverter output current
(torque). It is scaled from 0 to 200% of the rated motor current defined in P1-08.
11
Motor power (analog)
The amplitude of the analog output signal represents the apparent output power of
the inverter. It is scaled from 0 to 200% of the inverter nominal power.
12
Fieldbus/SBus (analog)
Analog output value is controlled via SBus if P1-12 = 5 or 8.
P2-11 Analog output 1 function selection
Setting range: 0 – 8 – 13
See table "P2-11: P2-13 analog outputs" (→ 2 133).
P2-12 Analog output 1 format
•
0: 0 – 10 V
•
1: 10 – 0 V
•
2: 0 – 20 mA
•
3: 20 – 0 mA
•
4: 4 – 20 mA
•
5: 20 – 4 mA
P2-13 Analog output 2 function selection
Setting range: 0 – 9 – 13
See table "P2-11 – P2-14" (→ 2 133).
P2-14 Analog output 2 format
0: 0 – 10 V
•
1: 10 – 0 V
•
2: 0 – 20 mA
•
3: 20 – 0 mA
•
4: 4 – 20 mA
•
5: 20 – 4 mA
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
134
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P2-15 – P2-20 Relay outputs
The function of the relay outputs can be selected according to the table below. If a relay is controlled depending on a limit value, it reacts as follows:
Relay closed
Relay open
lower limit
upper limit
9007211969771275
Settings
Function
Explanation
0
Inverter enabled
Relay contacts closed when inverter is enabled.
1
Inverter ok (digital) = no error
Relay contacts closed when inverter is ok (no error).
2
Motor operates at setpoint speed (digital)
Relay contacts closed when output frequency = setpoint frequency ±
0.1 Hz.
3
Motor speed ≥ 0 (digital)
Relay contacts closed when output frequency is greater than "zero frequency" (0.3% of base frequency)
4
Motor speed ≥ limit value (digital)
Relay contacts closed when output frequency is greater than the value
set in parameter "User relay upper limit". Relay contacts open when the
value is smaller than the value set in parameter "User relay lower limit"
5
Motor current ≥ limit value (digital)
6
Motor torque ≥ limit value (digital)
Relay contacts closed when motor current/torque is greater than the
current limit set in parameter "User relay upper limit". Relay contacts
open when the value is smaller than the value set in parameter "User
relay lower limit"
7
Analog input 2 ≥ limit value (digital)
Relay contacts closed when second analog input value is greater than
the value set in parameter "User relay upper limit". Relay contacts open
when the value is smaller than the value set in parameter "User relay
lower limit"
8
Hoist (only for P2-18)
This parameter is displayed when P4-12 hoist function is set to 1. The
inverter now controls the relay contact for hoist mode. (Value cannot be
changed if P4-12 = 1)
9
STO status
Relay contacts open if STO circuit is open (inverter indicates "inhibit")
10
PID error ≥ limit value
If the control error is greater than the "user relay upper limit", the relay
output is closed. If the control error is lower than the "user relay lower
limit", the relay output is opened. The relay opens also with negative
control errors.
111)
Drive referenced
If the LTX servo module is connected and the inverter is referenced,
the relay output contact is closed. This option is only available for the
following inverters:
• 230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
• 400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
• 575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
1) Only in connection with LTX.
P2-15 User relay output 1 function selection
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: 0 – 1 – 11
See table "P2-15 – P2-20 Relay outputs" (→ 2 135).
P2-16 Upper limit of user relay 1: Analog output 1
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
P2-17 Lower limit of user relay 1: Analog output 1
Setting range: 0.0 – P2-16%
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
135
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P2-18 User relay output 2 function selection
Setting range: 0 – 3 – 11
See table "P2-15 – P2-20 Relay outputs" (→ 2 135).
P2-19 Upper limit of user relay 2: Analog output 2
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
P2-20 Lower limit of user relay 2: Analog output 2
Setting range: 0.0 – P2-19%
P2-21: P2-22 Display scaling
P2-21 lets users scale the data from a selected source to provide a displayed value
that better represents the controlled process. The source value to be used for scaling
calculation is defined in P2-22.
If P2-21 ≠ 0, the scaled value will be shown on the display in addition to motor speed,
motor current, and motor power. Pressing the "Navigate" key toggles the display
between real-time values. A lowercase letter "c" on the left side of the display indicates that the scaled value is being displayed. The scaled display value is calculated
using the following equation:
Scaled display value = P2-21 × scaling source
P2-21 Display scaling factor
Setting range: -30,000 – 0,000 – 30,000
Also serves as a factor for the direction of rotation reversal in connection with a CCU
or MultiMotion. If the value is negative, the velocity control is inverted. Restart the
CCU after a change.
P2-22 Display scaling source
•
0: Motor speed information is used as the scaling source.
•
1: Motor current information is used as the scaling source.
•
2: The value of the second analog input is used as the scaling source. In this case,
the range of input values is 0 to 4096.
P2-23 Zero speed holding time
Setting range: 0.0 – 0.2 – 60.0 s
When P2-23 = 0, the output of the inverter is disabled immediately once the output
speed reaches zero.
When P2-23 ≠ 0, the motor holds zero speed for a certain time (defined in P2-23 in
seconds) before the output of the inverter is disabled. This function is usually used together with the relay output function to have the inverter issue a relay control signal
before the inverter output is disabled.
P2-24 PWM switching frequency
Setting range: 2 – 16 kHz (depending on rated inverter power)
136
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
You can use this parameter to have the motor hold zero speed (0 Hz) for a certain
time before it is shut down whenever it receives a stop command and reduces the output speed to zero.
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
Specifies the pulse width modulated switching frequency. A higher switching frequency means less motor noise, but also higher losses in the output stage. The maximum switching frequency depends on the inverter power rating.
The inverter reduces the switching frequency automatically when the heat sink temperature is excessively high.
P2-25 Second deceleration ramp, rapid stop ramp
Setting range:
For the inverters:
IP20
IP66
•
230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
•
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
•
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
•
575 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
Coast – 0.01 – 2.0 – 600 s
Coast – 0.01 – 2.0 – 600 s
For the inverters:
IP20
IP66
•
230 V: 7.5 – 75 kW
•
230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
•
400 V: 15 – 160 kW
•
400 V: 11 – 160 kW
•
575 V: 18.5 – 110 kW
•
575 V: 15 – 110 kW
Coast – 0.1 – 2.0 – 6000 s
Coast – 0.1 – 2.0 – 6000 s
Ramp time 2nd deceleration ramp, rapid stop ramp. Is selected automatically in the
event of a power failure if P2-38 = 2.
Can also be selected using digital inputs depending on other parameter settings. If set
to "0", the motor decelerates as quickly as possible without overvoltage fault.
P2-26 Flying start enable
When this function is enabled, the motor starts from the detected rotor speed. Short
delay possible if rotor is at standstill. Only possible, if P4-01 = 0 or 2. If the motor rotates against the speed enabled by the inverter, the flying start function is enabled.
The motor then decelerates to zero speed before accelerating in the opposite direction.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Enabled
P2-27 Standby mode
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: 0.0 – 250 s
When P2-27 > 0, the inverter goes to standby mode (output disabled) if the minimum
speed is maintained for the time specified in P2-27. This function is disabled when
P2‑23 > 0 or P4-12=1.
P2-28: P2-29 Master/slave parameter
The inverter uses parameter P2-28: P2-29 to scale the setpoint speed received from
the master of the network.
This function is particularly suited for applications where all motors in a network are
synchronized but run at different speeds based on a fixed scaling factor.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
137
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
For example, if a slave motor is set in P2-29 = 80% and P2-28 = 1 and the master motor in the network runs at 50 Hz, then the slave motor will run at 40 Hz after being enabled.
P2-28 Slave speed scaling
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Actual speed = digital speed × P2-29
•
2: Actual speed = (digital speed × P2-29) + analog input 1 reference
•
3: Actual speed = digital speed × P2-29 × analog input 1 reference
P2-29 Slave speed scaling factor
Setting range: -500 – 100 – 500%
P2-30 – P2-35 Analog inputs
These parameters enable users to configure analog inputs 1 and 2 to suit the signal
format present at the analog input control terminals. When set to 0 – 10 V, all negative
input voltages result in zero speed. When set to -10 – 10 V, all negative voltages result in the inverter running at negative speed, which is proportional to the magnitude of
the input voltage.
P2-30 Analog input 1 format
•
0: 0 – 10 V / unipolar voltage range
•
1: 10 – 0 V / unipolar voltage range
•
2: -10 – 10 V / bipolar voltage input
•
3: 0 – 20 mA / current input
•
4: t4 – 20 mA / current input
•
5: r4 – 20 mA / current input
•
6: t20 – 4 mA / current input
•
7: r20 – 4 mA / current input
"t.." indicates that the inverter shuts down when the signal is removed while the inverter is enabled. t4 – 20 mA, t20 – 4 mA
22872051/EN – 09/2016
"r.." indicates that the inverter moves along a ramp to P1-02 when the signal is removed while the inverter is enabled. r4 – 20 mA, r20-4 mA
138
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P2-31 Analog input 1 scaling
Setting range: 0 – 100 – 500%
-31
=2
00%
100%
31
0%
P2
P2
Speed
=
10
50%
P
1
2-3
=5
0%
0%
0%
50%
100%
Analog input
9007206625474443
P2-32 Analog input 1 offset
Setting range: -500 – 0 – 500%
Specifies an offset as a percentage of the entire input range applied to the analog input signal.
100%
3
2-
2
=
-5
0%
32
=
0%
P2
P
50%
Speed
P2
-3
2
=
50
%
0%
0%
50%
P2
100%
-3
2
=
10
Analog
input
0%
22872051/EN – 09/2016
-50%
-100%
18014401443356939
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
139
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P2-33 Analog input 2 format / motor protection
•
0: 0 – 10 V / unipolar voltage input
•
1: 10 – 0 V / unipolar voltage input
•
2: PTC-th / motor thermistor input
•
3: 0 – 20 mA / current input
•
4: t4 – 20 mA / current input
•
5: r4 – 20 mA / current input
•
6: t20 – 4 mA / current input
•
7: r 20 – 4 mA / current input
•
8: ty-b KTY84 motor temperature sensor, 120 °C trigger, 100 °C reset
•
9: ty-F KTY84 motor temperature sensor, 155 °C trigger, 125 °C reset
•
10: ty-H KTY84 motor temperature sensor, 180 °C trigger, 160 °C reset
•
11: Pt-b PT1000 motor temperature sensor, 120 °C trigger, 100 °C reset
•
12: Pt-F PT1000 motor temperature sensor, 155 °C trigger, 125 °C reset
•
13: Pt-H PT1000 motor temperature sensor, 180 °C trigger, 160 °C reset
"t.." indicates that the inverter shuts down when the signal is removed while the inverter is enabled.
"r.." indicates that the inverter moves along a ramp to P1-02 when the signal is removed while the inverter is enabled.
P2-34 Analog input 2 scaling
Setting range: 0 – 100 – 500%
P2-35 Analog input 2 offset
Setting range: -500 – 0 – 500%
Specifies an offset as a percentage of the entire input range applied to the analog input signal.
P2-36 Start mode selection
The selection of the start mode defines the inverter behavior with reference to the enable digital input and configures the automatic restart function.
Selection:
- Edge-r
- Auto-0 – Auto-5
•
Edge-r: The inverter does not start after switching-on or reset if digital input 1 remains closed. To start the inverter, the input must be closed after switching on or
resetting the inverter.
Auto-0
140
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Edge-r
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
WARNING
With the setting "Auto-0" and set enable signal, there is a danger of an automatic restart of the drive after an error message has been acknowledged (reset) or after
switch-on (voltage on).
Fatal or severe injuries and damage to property.
•
Disconnect the device from the power supply before rectifying a fault if automatic
restart of the driven machine after fault elimination is not permitted for safety
reasons.
•
After a reset, make sure that the drive can start up automatically depending on
the setting.
•
Prevent the drive from starting up inadvertently, for example by activating STO.
•
Auto-0: The inverter starts automatically after switching-on or reset and set enable
signal if digital input 1 is closed.
Auto-1 – Auto-5
WARNING
With the setting "Auto-1 – Auto-5" and set enable signal, there is a danger of an
automatic restart of the drive after fault elimination or after switch-on (voltage on) as
the inverter tries 1 - 5 times to automatically acknowledge the error.
Fatal or severe injuries and damage to property.
•
•
Disconnect the device from the power supply before rectifying a fault if automatic
restart of the driven machine after fault elimination is not permitted for safety
reasons.
•
After a reset, make sure that the drive can start up automatically depending on
the setting.
•
Prevent the drive from starting up inadvertently, for example by activating STO.
Auto-1 – Auto-5: After a switch off with error (trip) the inverter tries to restart up to
5 times (in intervals of 20 seconds). The duration of the intervals is defined in
P6-03. The number of attempted restarts is counted. If the inverter fails to start
with the final attempt, the inverter goes to error state and prompts the user to reset
the fault manually. Upon reset, the counter is reset.
P2-37 Keypad restart speed
22872051/EN – 09/2016
This parameter is only active if P1-12 = "1" or "2".
•
0: Minimum speed. Following a stop or restart, the motor runs at the minimum
speed set in P1-02.
•
1: Last speed. Following a stop or restart, the inverter returns to the value prior to
stopping that was last set using the keypad.
•
2: Current speed. If the inverter is configured for several speed references (generally manual/automatic control or local/decentralized control), a digital input ensures
that, when switching the keyboard mode, the inverter continues to run with the last
operating speed.
•
3: Fixed setpoint speed 8. Following a stop or restart, the inverter always runs at
the fixed setpoint speed 8 (P2-08).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
141
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
•
4: Minimum speed (terminal mode). Following a stop or restart, the inverter always
runs at the minimum speed set in P1-02.
•
5: Last speed (terminal mode). Following a stop or restart, the inverter returns to
the value prior to stopping that was last set.
•
6: Current speed (terminal mode). If the inverter is configured for several speed
references (generally manual/automatic control or local/decentralized control), a
digital input ensures that, when switching the keyboard mode, the inverter continues to run with the last operating speed.
•
7: Fixed setpoint speed 8 (terminal mode). Following a stop or restart, the inverter
always runs at the fixed setpoint speed 8 (P2-08).
The option 4 – 7 "Operation with terminal" applies to all operating modes.
P2-38 Mains loss stop control
The control behavior of the inverter as response to a power failure while the inverter is
enabled.
•
0: The inverter attempts to continue operation by recovering energy from the motor
under load. If the power failure lasts only briefly and if sufficient energy can be recovered before control electronics shuts down, the inverter will restart as soon as
the power supply is resumed.
•
1: The inverter immediately disables the output to the motor resulting in coasting or
freewheeling of the load. If you use this setting for loads with a high inertia, it might
be necessary to activate the flying start function (P2-26).
•
2: The inverter stops along the rapid stop ramp set in P2-25.
•
3: DC bus supply, if the inverter is supplied directly via the DC+ and DC-terminal,
the power failure detection can be deactivated with this function.
P2-39 Parameter lock
Locking parameters means that no parameters can be changed (indicated by "L").
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Enabled
P2-40 Extended parameter access code definition
Setting range: 0 – 101 – 9999
Access to the advanced menu (parameter groups 2, 3, 4, 5) is only possible when the
value entered in P1-14 is the same as the one in P2-40. In this way, users can change
the default value "101" of the code to any other value.
9.2.4
Parameter group 3: PID controller (level 2)
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 30.0
PID Controller proportional gain. Higher values result in a greater change of the inverter output frequency as response to minor changes of the feedback signal. If the
value is too high, it can cause instability.
P3-02 PID integral time constant
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 30.0 s
142
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P3-01 PID proportional gain
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
PID controller integral time constant. Higher values result in a damped response to
systems in which the overall process responds slowly.
P3-03 PID differential time constant
Setting range: 0.00 – 1.00 s
P3-04 PID operating mode
•
0: Direct operation – The motor speed decreases with increasing feedback signal.
•
1: Inverse operation – The motor speed increases with increasing feedback signal.
P3-05 PID reference selection
Selects the source for the PID reference/setpoint.
•
0: Fixed setpoint reference (P3-06) or P3-06, P3-14 - P3-16 (depending on the
PID controller setting).
•
1: Analog input 1
•
2: Analog input 2
•
3: Fieldbus PID reference see "P5-09 – P5-11 Fieldbus process output data (POx)
definition" (→ 2 153).
P3-06 PID fixed setpoint reference 1
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0%
Sets the preset digital PID reference/setpoint.
P3-07 PID controller upper limit
Setting range: P3-08 – 100.0%
PID controller upper limit output. This parameter specifies the maximum output value
of the PID controller. The upper limit is calculated as follows:
Upper limit = P3-07 × P1-01
A value of 100% corresponds to the maximum speed limit defined in P1-01.
P3-08 PID controller lower limit
Setting range: 0.0% − P3-07
Specifies the minimum output value of the PID controller. The lower limit is calculated
as follows:
Lower limit = P3-08 × P1-01.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P3-09 PID correcting variable limitation
•
0: Fixed setpoint limit – PID output range limited by P3-07 and P3-08.
•
1: Analog input 1 variable upper limit – PID maximum output limited by the signal
present at analog input 1.
•
2: Analog input 1 variable lower limit – PID minimum output limited by the signal
present at analog input 1.
•
3: PID output + analog input 1 – PID output is added to the speed reference
present at analog input 1.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
143
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P3-10 PID feedback selection
Selects the source for the PID feedback signal.
•
0: Analog input 2
•
1: Analog input 1
P3-11 PID ramp activation error
Setting range: 0.0 – 25.0%
Defines a PID error threshold. If the difference between setpoint and actual value is
less than the threshold, the internal ramps of the inverter are disabled.
If the PID deviation is greater, the ramps are activated to limit the the rate of change of
the motor speed and to respond quickly to minor deviations.
P3-12 PID actual value display scaling factor
Setting range: 0,000 – 50,000
This parameter is used to scale the actual value of the PID display. This enables users
to have displayed the current signal level of a transducer, for instance 0 - 10 bar, etc.
Scaled display value = P3-12 × PID output (= actual value), scaled display value
(rxxx).
P3-13 PID feedback wake-up level
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0%
Sets a programmable level. When the inverter is in standby or PID mode, the selected
feedback signal must fall below this threshold before the inverter returns to normal operation.
P3-14 PID fixed setpoint reference 2
Setting range: 0.0 – 100%
Sets the preset digital PID reference/setpoint.
P3-15 PID fixed setpoint reference 3
Setting range: 0.0 – 100%
Sets the preset digital PID reference/setpoint.
P3-16 PID fixed setpoint reference 4
Setting range: 0.0 – 100%
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Sets the preset digital PID reference/setpoint.
144
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9.2.5
9
Parameter group 4: Motor control (level 2)
P4-01 Control mode
•
0: VFC speed control
Vector speed control for induction motors with calculated rotor speed feedback
control. Field oriented control algorithms are used for motor speed control. As the
calculated rotor speed is used to internally close the speed loop, this control mode
effectively provides a closed loop control without physical encoder. With a properly
tuned speed controller, the static speed change is usually better than 1%. For optimal control, "auto tune" (P4‑02) should be carried out prior to first operation.
•
1: VFC torque control
Instead of the motor speed, the motor torque is controlled directly. In this operating
mode, the speed is not specified but changes depending on the load. The maximum speed is limited by P1-01. This operating mode is often used for winding applications where a constant torque is required to maintain cable tension. For optimal control, "auto tune" (P4‑02) should be carried out prior to first operation.
•
2: Speed control – Enhanced V/f
This operating mode basically corresponds to voltage control where the applied
motor voltage is controlled rather than the torque-generating current. The magnetizing current is controlled directly, which means no voltage increase is required.
The voltage characteristics can be selected using the energy saving function in
parameter P1-06. The default setting provides a linear characteristic where the
voltage is proportional to the frequency. The magnetizing current is controlled independently. Enabling the energy saving function selects a reduced voltage characteristics where the applied motor voltage is reduced at low speeds. The function
is usually used for fans to save energy consumption. The "auto tune" function
should also be enabled in this operating mode. In this case, the tuning process is
less complex and can be carried out more quickly.
•
3: Synchronous motor speed control (PMVC)
Speed control for synchronous motors. The same properties apply as for VFC
speed control.
•
4: Synchronous motor torque control
Torque control for synchronous motors. The same properties apply as for VFC
torque control.
•
5: Synchronous motor position control
Position control for synchronous motors. Speed and torque setpoints are provided
via process data in Motion Protocol (P1-12 = 8). An encoder is required for this
purpose.
•
6: LSPM motor speed control
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The LSPM control is a control type for asynchronous motors with synchronous
characteristics such as motors of type DR..J with LSPM technology from
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
INFORMATION
"Auto tune" has to be performed after each control mode change.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
145
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P4-02 "Auto tune"
•
0: Inhibited
•
1: Enable
Only enable the inverter after you have entered all nominal motor data correctly in the
parameters. You can also start the automatic measuring procedure "Auto tune" manually with the parameter P4-02 after entering the motor data.
After a reset to the factory settings, the measuring procedure starts automatically after
the first enable and takes up to 2 minutes depending on the control type.
INFORMATION
After changing the nominal motor data, auto tune has to be started again. The inverter must not be in "inhibit" mode.
P4-03 Speed controller proportional gain
Setting range: 0.1 – 50 – 400%
Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller. Higher values provide for better
output frequency regulation and response. If the value is too high, it can cause instability or even an overcurrent fault. For applications that require the best possible
control, you can adapt the value to the connected load by gradually increasing the
value and observing the actual speed of the load. Continue this process until you have
achieved the required dynamics without or with only slightly exceeding the control
range, i.e. the setpoint value of the output speed.
In general, higher friction loads can tolerate higher values of proportional gain. It might
be necessary to reduce the gain for loads with high inertia and low friction.
INFORMATION
Controller optimization should always initially take place via parameter P7-10. This
parameter affects parameters P4-03/P4-04 internally.
P4-04 Speed controller integral time constant
Setting range: 0.001 – 0.100 – 1.000 s
Defines the integral time for the speed controller. Small values result in a faster response to changes in the motor load but bear the risk that they cause instability. For
optimal dynamics, the value must be adjusted to match the connected load.
INFORMATION
Controller optimization should always initially take place via parameter P7-10. This
parameter affects parameters P4-03/P4-04 internally.
Setting range: 0.00, 0.50 – 0.99 (depending on the motor)
Power factor on the nameplate. Is required for vector control (P4-01 = 0 or 1).
P4-06 Torque reference/limit value source
If P4-01 = 0 or 3 (VFC speed control), this parameter defines the source for the maximum torque limit value.
146
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P4-05 Motor power factor
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
If P4-01 = 1 or 4 (VFC torque control), this parameter defines the source for the torque
reference value (setpoint).
If P4-01 = 2 (V/f open-loop speed control), this parameter defines the source for the
maximum torque limit value.
However, compliance with the torque limit is less dynamic in V/f control mode.
The torque reference/limit value source can be determined by the selection possibilities mentioned below.
The motor torque reference value is determined as a percentage of the rated motor
torque in P4-07. The rated motor torque is determined automatically by "Auto tune".
The motor torque limit value is always specified as a percentage of 0 − P4-07.
•
0: Fixed torque reference/limit as defined in P4-07.
•
1: Analog input 1 determines the torque reference/limit.
•
2: Analog input 2 determines the torque reference/limit.
If an analog input is used as a torque reference/limit value source, observe the following:
– Selection of the desired analog input signal format in parameter P2-30 / P2-33.
The input format must be unipolar. The scaling depends on the value set in
P4-07. 0 – 10 V = 0 – 200% of P4-07.
– Selection of the desired digital input function such as P1-15 = 3 (torque specification via analog input 2).
– Adjusting the timeout time for the maximum torque limit in P6-17 analog input
2.
•
3: Fieldbus communication
Fieldbus torque setpoint. When this option is selected, the torque limit is provided
by the fieldbus master. A value between 0 and 200% can be entered in P4-07.
•
4: Master inverter
The master inverter in a master slave network provides the torque setpoint.
•
5: PID output
The output of the PID controller provides the torque setpoint.
P4-07 – P4-09 Motor torque limit settings
22872051/EN – 09/2016
These parameters are used to adjust the torque limits of the motor.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
147
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
The maximum torque limit can also be specified directly via process data communication.
M
P4-09
P4-07
P4-08
n
P4-08
P4-07
P4-09
18014401982492939
P4-07 Max. motor torque limit
Setting range: P4-08 – 200 – 500%
This parameter is used to set the upper torque limit. The limit value source is specified
with parameter P4-06.
Depending on the operating mode, the parameter refers to the torque-generating current (vector operation) or the apparent output current (V/f operation).
Vector operation: P4-07 limits the torque-generating current Iq (P0-15).
V/f operation: P4-07 limits the inverter output current to the specified limit value before
the inverter output frequency is reduced for current limitation.
Example asynchronous motors:
Setting and verifying the torque limit (P4-07) for asynchronous motors:
Data of the asynchronous motor:
Mn =
1.1 kW × 9550
= 7.4 Nm
1
1420 min
The torque is limited to Mmax = 8.1 Nm.
M
P407= max × 100 % = 109.45 %
Mn
For verification of the torque-generating inverter current in P0-15:
Iq = cos(φ) × Is = cos(0.79) × 2.4 A = 1.89 A
148
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Pn = 1.1 kW, In = Is = 2.4 A, nn = 1420 1/min, cos φ = 0.79
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
For a calculated torque limit of 109.45%, P0-15 should display the following
M
P 0 - 15= max × Iq = 2.06 A
Mn
.
Example synchronous motors:
Setting and verifying the torque limit (P4-07) for synchronous motors:
The torque is limited to Mmax = 1.6 Nm.
Data of the synchronous motor: I0 = 1.5 A, M0 = 0.8 Nm
M
P407= max × 100 % = 200 %
M0
For verification of the torque-generating inverter current in P0-15:
Id = 0, standard for synchronous motors with vector control, leads to Iq ≈ M.
For a calculated torque limit of 200%, P0-15 should display the following:
P0-15 = I0 × 200% = 3 A
P4-08 Min. torque limit
Setting range: 0.0 – P4-07 %
Sets the minimum torque limit. As long as the motor speed is below the maximum
speed defined in P1-01, the inverter attempts to maintain this torque at any time during operation on the motor.
If this parameter is set >0 and the maximum speed of the inverter is additionally increased to a value that is not reached during the travel cycle, the inverter is always in
motor mode. Depending on the application, a braking resistor is thus not necessary.
INFORMATION
Use this parameter with the utmost care because the output frequency of the inverter
will increase (to reach the torque) and the selected setpoint speed might be exceeded.
P4-09 Max. regenerative torque limit
Setting range: P4-08 – 200 – 500%
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Defines the current limit in regenerative mode. The value of this parameter represents
the percentage value of the rated motor current defined in P1-08. The current limit
specified in this parameter overrides the normal torque-generating current limit when
the motor operates in regenerative mode. If the value is too high, the result is an excessive motor current distortion causing the motor to behave unstable in regenerative
mode. If the value is too small, the output torque of the motor might drop in regenerative mode.
P4-10: P4-11 V/f characteristic settings
The voltage/frequency characteristic curve determines the voltage level applied to the
motor at a given frequency. Parameters P4-10 and P4-11 let you change the V/f characteristic curve if required.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
149
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Parameter P4-10 can be set to any frequency between 0 and the base frequency
(P1-09). It represents the frequency at which the percentage adjustment level set in
P4-11 is used. This function is only active when P4‑01 = 2.
V
P1-07 = 230 V
[3]
P4-11 = 165 V
[1]
[2]
P1-11 = X% of P1-07
(boost)
P4-11 = 40 V
P4-10 = 10 Hz
P1-09 = 50 Hz
f
18014401982491019
[1]
Normal V/f characteristic curve
[2]
Adjusted V/f characteristic curve
[3]
Adjusted V/f characteristic curve
P4-10 V/f characteristic adjustment frequency
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0% of P1-09
P4-11 V/f characteristic adjustment voltage
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0% of P1-07
P4-12 Motor brake control
Enables the hoist function of the inverter.
Parameters P4-13 through P4-16 are enabled.
Relay contact 2 is set to hoist. The function cannot be changed.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Activated
For examples, refer to chapter "Hoist function" (→ 2 70).
P4-13 Brake release time
Setting range: 0.0 – 5.0 s
P4-14 Brake application time
Setting range: 0.0 – 5.0 s
This parameter is used to set the time required for the mechanical brake to apply. This
parameter prevents a sagging of the drive in particular in hoists.
150
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
This parameter is used to set the time required for the mechanical brake to release.
This parameter prevents a sagging of the drive especially in hoists.
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P4-15 Torque threshold for brake release
Setting range: 0.0 – 200%
Defines the torque in % of the maximum torque. This percentage torque must be generated before the motor brake is released.
This is to ensure that the motor is connected and torque is generated to prevent the
load from dropping when the brake is released. For V/f control, the torque proof is not
activated. This is only recommended for applications with horizontal movement.
P4-16 Hoist torque threshold timeout
Setting range: 0.0 – 25.0 s
Sets the time the inverter takes after a start command to attempt to generate enough
motor torque to exceed the brake release threshold set in P4-15. If the torque
threshold is not reached within this time, the inverter issues a fault.
P4-17 Thermal motor protection to UL508C
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Activated
The inverters come equipped with a thermal motor protection function according to
NEC to protect the motor from overload. In an internal memory, the motor current is
accumulated over time.
The inverter goes to fault state as soon as the thermal limit is exceeded (I.t-trP).
Once the output current of the inverter is less than the set rated motor current, the internal memory is decremented depending on the output current.
When P4-17 is disabled, the thermal overload memory is reset when switching power
off and on again.
When P4-17 is enabled, the memory is maintained even after power off and on again.
For inverters that are operated with a line frequency of 50 Hz, the factory setting is 0 =
disabled.
For inverters that are operated with a line frequency of 60 Hz, the factory setting is 1 =
enabled.
9.2.6
Parameter group 5: Fieldbus communication (level 2)
P5-01 Inverter address
Setting range: 0 − 1 – 63
This parameter is used to set the inverter address for SBus, Modbus, fieldbus and
master/slave.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P5-02 SBus baud rate/CANopen
Sets the SBus baud rate. This parameter must be used for operation with gateways or
MOVI‑PLC®.
•
0: 125: 125 kBd
•
1: 250: 250 kBd
•
2: 500: 500 kBd
•
3: 1000: 1000 kBd
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
151
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P5-03 Modbus RTU baud rate
Sets the expected Modbus baud rate.
•
0: 9.6: 9600 Bd
•
1: 19.2: 19200 Bd
•
2: 38.4: 38400 Bd
•
3: 57.6: 57600 Bd
•
4: 115.2: 115200 Bd
P5-04 Modbus RTU data format
Sets the expected Modbus data format.
•
0: n-1: no parity, 1 stop bit
•
1: n-2: no parity, 2 stop bits
•
2: O-1: odd parity, 1 stop bit
•
3: E-1: even parity, 1 stop bit
P5-05 Response to communication failure
This parameter is used to specify the inverter behavior after a communication failure
and the following timeout set in P5-06.
•
0: Fault and coast to stop
•
1: Stop ramp and error
•
2: Stop ramp (without fault)
•
3: Fixed setpoint speed 8
P5-06 Communication failure timeout for SBus and Modbus
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 5.0 s
Specifies the time in seconds after which the inverter performs the response set in
P5-05. When set to "0.0 s", the inverter maintains the actual speed even if communication fails.
P5-07 Ramp specified via fieldbus
This parameter is used to enable internal or external ramp control. If enabled, the inverter follows the external ramps specified by MOVILINK® process data (PO3).
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Activated
P5-08 Synchronization duration
Defines the duration of the sync message from MOVI-PLC®. This value must correspond to the one set in MOVI-PLC®. When P5-08 = 0, the inverter ignores synchronization.
152
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: 0, 5 – 20 ms
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P5-09 – P5-11 Fieldbus process output data (POx) definition
This parameter is used to define the process data words sent from the PLC or the
gateway to the inverter.
•
0: Speed U/min (1 = 0.2 1/min)→ only possible, if P1-10 ≠ 0
•
1: Speed % (0x4000 = 100% P1-01)
•
2: Torque setpoint/limit value % (1 = 0.1%) → Set inverter to P4‑06 = 3.
•
3: Ramp time (1 = 1 ms) to maximum 65535 ms.
•
4: PID reference (0x1000 = 100%) → P1-12 = 3 (control signal source).
•
5: Analog output 1 (0x1000 = 100%)1)
Digital output 4 (0x0001 = 24 V, other values = 0 V))2)
•
6: Analog output 2 (0x1000 = 100%)1)
Digital output 5 (0x0001 = 24 V, other values = 0 V)2)
•
7: No function
1) When the analog outputs are controlled by fieldbus or SBus, parameter P2-11 or P2-13 = 12 (fieldbus/
SBus (analog)) must be set additionally.
2) When the digital outputs are controlled by fieldbus or SBus, parameter P2-11 or P2-13 = 13 (fieldbus/
SBus (digital)) must be set additionally.
P5-09 Fieldbus PO2 definition
Definition of output 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-09 – P5-11
P5-10 Fieldbus PO3 definition
Definition of output 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-09 – P5-11
P5-11 Fieldbus PO4 definition
Definition of output 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-09 – P5-11
P5-12 – P5-14 Fieldbus process input data (PIx) definition
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Definition of process data words sent from the inverter to the PLC or gateway.
•
01) : Speed: rpm (1 = 0.2 rpm)
•
1: Speed % (0x4000 = 100% in relation to the maximum speed P1-01))
•
2: Current % (1 = 0.1% in relation to the nominal inverter current)
•
3: Torque % (1 = 0.1% in relation to the nominal motor torque, calculated from
P1-08)
•
4: Power % (1 = 0.1% in relation to the rated inverter power)
•
5: Temperature (1 = 0.01 °C)
•
6: DC link voltage (1 = 1 V)
•
7: Analog input 1 (0x1000 = 100%)
•
8: Analog input 2 (0x1000 = 100%)
•
9: IO status of basic device and option
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
153
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
High byte
–
–
–
RL5* RL4* RL3* RL2
Low byte
RL1
DI8*
DI7*
DI6*
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
*Only available with suitable option module.
RL = Relay
•
102) : LTX position low byte (number of increments within one revolution)
•
112): LTX position high byte (number of revolutions)
1) Only possible if P1-10 ≠ 0.
2) Only for inserted LTX module.
P5-12 Fieldbus PI2 definition
Definition of input 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-12 – P5-14.
P5-13 Fieldbus PI3 definition
Definition of input 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-12 – P5-14
P5-14 Fieldbus PI4 definition
Definition of input 2, 3, 4 for transmitted process data
Parameter description like P5-12 – P5-14
P5-15 Expansion relay 3 function selection
INFORMATION
Only available and possible when I/O expansion module is connected.
•
0: Inverter enabled
•
1: Inverter ok
•
2: Motor operates at setpoint speed.
•
3: Motor speed > 0
•
4: Motor speed > limit value
•
5: Motor current > limit value
•
6: Motor torque > limit value
•
7: Analog input 2 > limit value
•
8: Fieldbus control
•
9: STO status
•
10: PID error ≥ limit value
P5-16 Relay 3 upper limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
154
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Defines the function of expansion relay 3.
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P5-17 Relay 3 lower limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 200.0%
P5-18 Expansion relay 4 function selection
Defines the function of expansion relay 4.
Parameter description like P5-15.
P5-19 Relay 4 upper limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0 – 200.0%
P5-20 Relay 4 lower limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 200.0%
INFORMATION
The function of expansion relay 5 is fixed to "Motor speed > 0".
9.2.7
Parameter group 6: Extended parameters (level 3)
P6-01 Firmware upgrade enable
Enables firmware upgrade mode that lets the user upgrade the firmware of the user interface and/or firmware for output stage control. Is usually performed by the PC software.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Enabled (DSP + I/O)
•
2: Enabled (I/O only)
•
3: Enabled (DSP only)
INFORMATION
This parameter should not be changed by the user. The firmware upgrade is performed automatically by the PC software.
P6-02 Automatic thermal management
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Enables automatic thermal management. The inverter automatically reduces the output switching frequency at excessive heat sink temperature to reduce the risk of an
overtemperature fault.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Activated
Temperature limits
Action
70 °C
Automatic reduction from 16 kHz to 12 kHz.
75 °C
Automatic reduction from 12 kHz to 8 kHz.
80 °C
Automatic reduction from 8 kHz to 6 kHz.
85 °C
Automatic reduction from 6 kHz to 4 kHz.
90 °C
Automatic reduction from 4 kHz to 2 kHz.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
155
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Temperature limits
Action
97 °C
Error message overtemperature
P6-03 Auto-reset delay time
Setting range: 1 – 20 – 60 s
Sets the delay time that elapses between consecutive reset attempts of the inverter, if
auto reset is enabled in P2-36.
P6-04 Hysteresis band user relay
Setting range: 0.0 – 0.3 – 25.0%
This parameter is used together with P2-11 and P2-13 = 2 or 3 to set a band around
the setpoint speed (P2-11 = 2) or to set zero speed (P2-11 = 3). When the speed is
within this band, the inverter runs at setpoint speed or at zero speed. This function
prevents "chatter" on the relay output when the operating speed coincides with the
value at which the state of the digital output/relay output changes.
Example: When P2-13 = 3, P1-01 = 50 Hz and P6-04 = 5%, the relay contacts close
above 2.5 Hz.
P6-05 Encoder feedback enable
When set to "1", encoder feedback is enabled. This parameter is enabled automatically as soon as an LTX module is connected.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Activated
P6-06 Encoder PPR
Setting range: 0 – 65535 PPR (pulses per revolution)
Is used together with the LTX module or other encoder cards. When encoder feedback mode is enabled (P6-05 = 1), set the parameter to the number of impulses per
revolution for the connected encoder. Improper setting of this parameter can result in
loss of motor control and/or a fault. When set to "0", encoder feedback is disabled.
INFORMATION
For HTL/TTL encoders, a minimum of 512 increments are necessary for operation.
P6-07 Trigger threshold speed error/speed monitoring
Setting range: 1.0 – 5.0 – 100%
The parameter is enabled for all operating modes with encoder feedback (HTL/TTL/
LTX) and for the hoist function without encoder feedback. If the speed error exceeds
this limit value, the inverter is switched off and goes to speed error depending on the
firmware status (SP-Err or ENC02). When set to "100%", speed monitoring is disabled.
P6-08 Max. frequency for speed setpoint
Setting range: 0; 5 – 20 kHz
156
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
This parameter specifies the maximum permitted speed error between the speed setpoint and the actual speed value.
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
Use this parameter if the motor speed setpoint is to be controlled by a frequency input
signal (connected to digital input 3).
You can use this parameter to determine the input frequency that corresponds to the
maximum motor speed (set in P1-01). The maximum frequency that can be set in this
parameter must be within a range of 5 kHz and 20 kHz.
When set to "0", this function is disabled.
P6-09 Droop speed/load distribution control
Setting range: 0.0 – 25.0%
This function requires one motor for each inverter. In applications where several motors drive a common load, but different motor loads occur due to mechanical reasons,
this function can balance the load of individual motors. Group drives are not possible.
This parameter only works in VFC speed control P4-01 = 0.
With setting P6-09 = 0.0, the speed droop/load distribution control function is disabled.
With setting P6-09 > 0.0, this function induces a reduction of the actual speed compared to the setpoint speed for increased load.
Actual speed = setpoint speed - P6-09 × P1-09 × (current application torque of the
motor)/nominal motor torque
In most cases, a small value in P6-09 is sufficient to achieve an adequate load distribution. If the value is too high, the actual speed controls towards 0 for small setpoint
speeds or high loads.
P6-10 Reserved
P6-11 Speed holding time on enable (fixed setpoint speed 7)
Setting range: 0.0 – 250 s
Defines the time during which the inverter runs at fixed setpoint speed 7 (P2-07) when
the enable signal is applied to the drive. The fixed setpoint speed can be any value
from the minimum to the maximum frequency and in either direction.
This function can be useful in applications where controlled start behavior is required
regardless of normal system operation. This function allows the user to program the
inverter in such a way that it always starts at the same frequency and in the same direction of rotation for a specified period of time before returning to normal operation.
When set to "0.0", this function is disabled.
P6-12 Speed holding time on inhibit (fixed setpoint speed 8)
Setting range: 0.0 – 250 s
Defines the time during which the inverter runs at fixed setpoint speed 8 (P2-08) after
having removed the enable signal and before the stop ramp.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
INFORMATION
Setting this parameter to a value > 0 lets the inverter continue to run at the fixed setpoint speed for the set time after having removed the enable signal. It is important
that you make sure that this operating mode is safe before you use this function.
When set to "0.0", this function is disabled.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
157
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P6-13 Fire mode logic/emergency mode
Enables fire mode/emergency mode. In this mode, the inverter ignores most faults.
When the inverter is in fault condition, it resets itself every 5 s until total failure or lack
of power.
Do not use this function for servo applications or lifting applications.
•
0: Open trigger: Fire mode/emergency mode
•
1: Close trigger: Fire mode/emergency mode
P6-14 Fire mode/emergency mode speed
Setting range: -P1-01 – 0 – P1-01 Hz
The speed used in fire mode/emergency mode.
P6-15 Analog output 1 scaling
Setting range: 0.0 – 100.0 – 500.0%
Specifies the scaling factor in % used for analog output 1.
-1 5
=2
00%
100%
15
10
0%
P6
P6
Speed
=
50%
P
5
6-1
=5
0%
0%
0%
50%
100%
Analog output
13089609099
P6-16 Analog output 1 offset
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: -500.0 – 0.0 – 500.0%
158
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
This parameter specifies the offset in % used for analog output 1.
100%
16
=
-5
0%
P6
P6
-
16
=
0%
50%
16
=
50
%
Speed
P6
0%
0%
100%
50%
1
6-
6
=
1
Analog
output
%
00
P
-50%
-100%
13089606539
P6-17 Max. torque limit timeout
Setting range: 0.0 – 0.5 − 25.0 s
Specifies the maximum time allowed for the motor to run at the torque limit for motor/
generator mode (P4-07: P4-09) before issuing a fault. This parameter is only enabled
for operation with vector control.
When set to "0.0", this function is disabled.
P6-18 DC braking voltage level
Setting range: Auto, 0.0 – 30.0%
Specifies the amount of DC voltage as a percentage of the nominal voltage (P1-07)
applied to the motor when a stop command is received. This parameter is activated for
V/f control only.
P6-19 Braking resistor value
Setting range: 0; Min-R – 200 Ω
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Sets the braking resistor value in ohms. This value is used for thermal protection of
the braking resistor. Min-R depends on the inverter.
Setting this parameter to "0" disables the protection function for the braking resistor.
P6-20 Braking resistor power
Setting range: 0.0 – 200.0 kW
Sets the braking resistor power in kW with a resolution of 0.1 kW. This value is used
for thermal protection of the braking resistor.
When set to "0.0", the protection function for the braking resistor is disabled.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
159
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P6-21 Brake chopper operating cycle at undertemperature
Setting range: 0.0 – 20.0%
This parameter is used to specify the duty cycle for the brake chopper when the inverter is in undertemperature fault state. To heat the inverter, install a braking resistor
at the heat sink of the inverter until the correct operating temperature is reached.
Use this parameter with the utmost care. An incorrect setting might result in exceeding
the rated power capacity of the braking resistor.
Use external thermal protection for the braking resistor to avoid this risk.
When set to "0.0", this function is disabled.
P6-22 Reset fan runtime
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Reset runtime
Setting this parameter to "1" resets the internal runtime counter of the fan to "0" (as
displayed in P0-35).
P6-23 Reset kWh meter
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Reset kWh counter
Setting this parameter to "1" resets the internal kWh counter to "0" (as displayed in
P0-26 and P0-27).
P6-24 Parameter default settings
Inverter factory settings:
The inverter must not be enabled and the display must show "Inhibit".
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Factory settings except for bus parameters.
•
2: Factory settings for all parameters.
P6-25 Access code level 3
Setting range: 0 – 201 – 9999
User-defined access code that has to be entered in P1-14 to allow access to the advanced parameters in groups 6 to 9.
•
0: Output value
•
1: Save parameters
•
2: Delete parameter
Selection 0: The output value is always displayed.
Selection 1: Saving the current parameterization.
The entire parameter settings are saved to a secured memory. Upon successful completion of the backup, the display shows "USr-PS".
The memory content is preserved also when the device is de-energized and when the
factory settings are activated.
160
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P6-26 Parameter backup
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
Selection 2: Deleting the saved parameterization from the secure memory.
The internal memory is deleted again. The display shows "USr-cL".
Restoring the saved parameterization from the memory:
By pressing the four keys "Start + Stop + Up + Down" simultaneously for at least
2 seconds, the saved parameter setting can be restored. This overwrites the parameter data in the device and resets it to the value at the time of the backup. The display shows "U-dEF" upon successful completion of the restoring.
Establishing the delivery state (no change to preceding versions):
To reset the inverter to the factory settings (delivery state), press the three keys "Stop
+ Up + Down" for at least 2 seconds until "P-dEF" appears on the display. This process overwrites the current parameterization without deleting the saved data in the secure memory with the parameter backup.
9.2.8
Parameter group 7: Motor control parameters (level 3)
NOTICE
Possible inverter damage
The following parameters are used internally by the inverter to provide for optimum
motor control. Incorrect settings of the parameters can result in poor performance
and unexpected behavior of the motor. Adjustments may be made only by experienced users who fully understand the functions of these parameters.
Equivalent wiring diagram for AC motors.
RS
Lsq
Lsd
‚
Rr
I drms
U
‚
R r 1 -s s
Xn
7372489995
P7-01 Motor stator resistance (Rs)
Setting range: depends on the motor (Ω)
The stator resistance value is the ohmic phase-to-phase resistance of the copper
winding. This value is determined and set automatically during "auto tune".
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Instead, you can enter this value manually.
P7-02 Motor rotor resistance (Rr)
Setting range: depends on the motor (Ω)
For induction motors: Phase-to-phase rotor resistance value in ohms.
For synchronous motors: Value has to be set to 0 ohm.
P7-03 Motor stator inductance (Lsd)
Setting range: depends on the motor (H)
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
161
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
For induction motors: Phase stator inductance value.
For synchronous motors: Phase d-axis stator inductance in Henry.
P7-04 Motor magnetization current (Id rms)
Setting range: 10% × P1-08 − 80% × P1-08 (A)
For induction motors: Magnetizing current/no-load current. Before auto tune, this value
is approximated to 60% of the rated motor current (P1-08) assuming a motor power
factor of 0.8.
P7-05 Motor leakage loss coefficient (sigma)
Setting range: 0.025 − 0.10 − 0.25
For induction motors: Leakage loss coefficient of the motor.
P7-06 Motor stator inductance (Lsq) − only for synchronous motors
Setting range: depends on the motor (H)
For synchronous motors: Phase q-axis stator inductance in Henry.
P7-07 Enhanced generator control
Use this parameter when stability problems occur in extremely regenerative applications. When this function is enabled, regenerative operation is possible at low speeds.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Enabled
P7-08 Parameter adjustment
Use this parameter for small motors (P < 0.75 kW) with high impedance. When this
function is enabled, the thermal motor model can adjust rotor and stator resistance
during operation. In this way, impedance effects occurring with vector control and
caused by heating are compensated.
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Enabled
P7-09 Overvoltage current limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 100%
This parameter is only applicable in vector speed control mode and takes effect when
the DC link voltage of the inverter exceeds a preset limit. This voltage level is set internally exactly below the trigger threshold for overvoltage.
When set to "0.0", this function is disabled.
162
•
The motor with high inertia is decelerated. Regenerative energy flows back to the
inverter.
•
The DC link voltage increases and reaches the UZmax level.
•
To discharge the DC link, the frequency inverter delivers current (P7-09) and the
motor accelerates again.
•
The DC link voltage falls below UZmax again.
•
The motor is continued to be decelerated.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Procedure:
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P7-10 Stiffness (for vector control)
Setting range: 0 – 10 – 600
P7-10 is used to improve the control response for control modes without encoder
feedback. P7-10 has an internal effect on the P and I components of the control. This
value can usually remain set to the default value "10".
Increasing P7-10 increases the stiffness of the motor. Decreasing this parameter has
the opposite effect.
P7-11 Pulse width min. limit
Setting range: 0 – 500
This parameter is used to limit the minimum output pulse width. The minimum output
pulse width can be used for applications with long cables. Increasing the value of this
parameter reduces the risk of overcurrent faults with long motor cables. The reason is
that the number of voltage edges and consequently load peaks are reduced. At the
same time, however, also the maximum available output motor voltage is reduced for
a certain input voltage.
The factory setting depends on the inverter.
Time = value × 16.67 ns
P7-12 Premagnetization time
Setting range: 0 – 5000 ms
Use this parameter to define a premagnetization time. Consequently, there is a corresponding start delay when the inverter is enabled. If the value is too small, the inverter
might generate an overcurrent fault when the acceleration ramp is very short.
In the case of operating modes for synchronous motors, this parameter, together with
P7-14, is used for the initial rotor alignment. In particular, it must be adjusted for high
moments of mass inertia.
The factory setting depends on the inverter.
P7-13 D-gain vector speed controller
Setting range: 0.0 – 400%
This parameter is used to set the differential gain (%) for the speed controller in vector
mode operation.
P7-14 Low-frequency torque boost/premagnetization current
Setting range: 0.0 – 100%
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The boost current applied at start-up as a % of the rated motor current (P1-08). The
inverter has a boost function. Current can be injected into the motor at low speed in
order to ensure that the rotor alignment is maintained and the motor operates efficiently at low speeds.
For a boost at a low speed, run the inverter at the lowest frequency required for the
application. Increase the values to provide the required torque and to ensure smooth
operation.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
163
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P7-14 is used in conjunction with P7-12 to align the rotor initially.
18364580875
P7-15 Torque boost frequency limit
Setting range: 0.0 – 50%
Frequency range for the applied boost current (P7-14) in % of the rated motor frequency (P1-09).
This parameter works according to the figure below.
18364580875
P7-16 Motor nameplate speed
The parameter has no function.
9.2.9
Parameter group 8: Application-specific parameters (only LTX) (level 3)
INFORMATION
P8-01 Simulated encoder scaling
Setting range: 20 – 23
P8-02 Input pulse scaling value
Setting range: 20 – 216
164
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
For further information refer to the "MOVITRAC® LTX Servo Module for MOVITRAC®
LTP-B" addendum for the operating instructions, chapter "LTX function parameter set
(level 3)".
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P8-03 Lag error low word
Setting range: 0 – 65535
Number of increments within a revolution.
P8-04 Lag error high word
Setting range: 0 – 65535
Number of revolutions.
P8-05 Reference travel type
•
0: Disabled
•
1: Zero pulse with negative travel direction
•
2: Zero pulse with positive travel direction
•
3: End of reference cam negative travel direction
•
4: End of reference cam positive travel direction
•
5: No reference travel; only possible without enabled drive
•
6: Fixed stop positive direction of travel
•
7: Fixed stop negative direction of travel
P8-06 Position controller proportional gain
Setting range: 0.0 – 1.0 – 400%
P8-07 Touch probe trigger mode
•
0: TP1 P edge TP2 P edge
•
1: TP1 N edge TP2 P edge
•
2: TP1 N edge TP2 N edge
•
3: TP1 P edge TP2 N edge
P8-08 Reserved
P8-09 Velocity precontrol gain
Setting range: 0 – 100 – 400%
Defines the command source for using terminal mode.
This parameter takes effect only when P1-12 > 0. It allows the control signal source
defined in P1-12 to be overwritten.
High: The sources defined in parameters P9-02 to P9-07 control the inverter.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Low: The control signal source set in P1-12 is effective.
The control signal sources of the inverter are prioritized as follows:
•
STO deactivation
•
External fault
•
Rapid stop
•
Enable
•
P9-09
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
165
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
•
Run forward/run reverse/reverse
•
Reset
P8-10 Acceleration precontrol gain
Setting range: 0 – 400%
P8-11 Reference offset low word
Setting range: 0 – 65535
P8-12 Reference offset high word
Setting range: 0 – 65535
P8-13 Reserved
P8-14 Reference enable torque
Setting range: 0 – 100 – 500%
9.2.10
Parameter group 9: Digital inputs defined by the user (level 3)
The purpose of parameter group 9 is to give the user full flexibility to control the inverter behavior in complex applications that require specific parameter settings. Use
the parameters of this group with utmost care. Only users that are absolutely familiar
with the use of the inverter and its control functions should adjust the parameters of
this group.
Overview of functions
Parameter group 9 allows for the advanced programming of the inverter including user
defined functions for the digital and analog inputs of the inverter as well as control of
the speed setpoint source.
The following rules apply to parameter group 9:
•
The parameters of this group cannot be changed unless P1-15 = 0.
•
Changing the value P1-15 clears all the previous settings made in parameter
group 9.
•
Parameter group 9 has to be configured individually by the user.
INFORMATION
Write down your settings.
The parameters for selecting a logic source let users directly define the source for a
control function in the inverter. These parameters can only be linked to digital values,
which either enable or disable the function depending on their state.
Parameters defined as logic sources have the following range of possible settings:
Inverter display
166
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Setting
Function
STO input
Linked to the status of STO inputs, if allowed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Logic source selection parameters
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Inverter display
Setting
Function
Always OFF
Function permanently disabled.
Always ON
Function permanently enabled.
Digital input 1
Function linked to digital input 1 status.
Digital input 2
Function linked to digital input 2 status.
Digital input 3
Function linked to digital input 3 status.
Digital input 4
Function linked to digital input 4 (analog input 1) status.
Digital input 5
Function linked to digital input 5 (analog input 2) status.
Digital input 6
Function linked to digital input 6 (requires extended I/O option).
Digital input 7
Function linked to digital input 7 (requires extended I/O option).
Digital input 8
Function linked to digital input 8 (requires extended I/O option).
9
The control sources for the inverter are handled in the following order of priority (from
highest to lowest priority):
•
STO circuit
•
External fault
•
Rapid stop
•
Enable
•
Terminal control override
•
CW/CCW operation
•
Reset
Data source selection parameters
Parameters for selecting a data source define the signal source for speed source 1 –
8. Parameters defined as data sources have the following range of possible settings:
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Inverter display
Setting
Function
Analog input 1
Analog input 1 signal level (P0-01).
Analog input 2
Analog input 2 signal level (P0-02).
Fixed setpoint speed
Selected fixed setpoint speed.
Keypad (motorized potentiometer)
Keypad speed setpoint (P0-06).
PID controller output
PID controller output (P0-10).
Master speed setpoint
Master speed setpoint (master/slave operation).
Fieldbus speed setpoint
Fieldbus speed setpoint PE2.
User defined speed set- User defined speed setpoint (PLC function).
point
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
167
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Inverter display
Setting
Function
Frequency input
Pulse frequency input reference.
P9-01 Enable input source
Setting range: SAFE, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
This parameter specifies the source of the frequency inverter enable function. This
function is usually assigned to digital input 1. It allows the use of a hardware enable
signal in different situations where, for example, the commands for run forward or run
reverse from external sources such as fieldbus controls signals or a PLC program.
P9-02 Rapid stop input source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the rapid stop input. As response to a rapid stop command, the
motor stops using the deceleration time set in P2-25.
P9-03 Input source for clockwise rotation (CW)
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the CW rotation command.
P9-04 Input source for counterclockwise rotation (CCW)
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the CCW rotation command.
INFORMATION
When the CW rotation and CCW rotation commands are applied to the motor simultaneously, the inverter executes a rapid stop.
P9-05 Latch function enable
Setting range: OFF, ON
Enables the latching function of the digital inputs.
The latching function makes it possible to use momentary start signals to start and
stop the motor in any direction. In this case, the enable input source (P9-01) must be
linked to a normally closed control source (open for stop).
This control source must be logic "1" to allow the motor to start. The inverter then responds to momentary or pulse start and stop signals as defined in parameters P9-03
and P9-04.
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the input for the direction of rotation reversal.
P9-07 Reset input source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the reset command.
168
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
P9-06 Direction of rotation reversal
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
9
P9-08 External fault input source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies the source of the external fault command.
P9-09 Terminal control enable source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Defines the source of the command used to select terminal control operation of the inverter. This parameter takes effect only when P1-12 > 0. It allows terminal control to
be selected in order to override the control signal source defined in P1-12.
P9-10 – P9-17 Speed source
Up to 8 speed setpoint sources can be defined for the inverter and can be selected
during operation using P9-18 – P9-20. When changing the setpoint source, the new
source is applied immediately during ongoing operation. The inverter need not have to
be stopped and restarted.
P9-10 Speed source 1
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-11 Speed source 2
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-12 Speed source 3
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-13 Speed source 4
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-14 Speed source 5
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-15 Speed source 6
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
169
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P9-16 Speed source 7
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-17 Speed source 8
Setting range: Ain-1, Ain-2, fixed setpoint speed 1 – 8, d-Pot, PID, Sub-dr, F-bus,
user, pulse
Specifies the source of the speed.
P9-18 – P9-20 Input speed selection
The active speed setpoint can be selected during operation by means of the status of
the above mentioned parameters for the logic source. The speed setpoints are selected according to the following logic:
P9-20
P9-19
P9-18
Speed setpoint source
0
0
0
1 (P9-10)
0
0
1
2 (P9-11)
0
1
0
3 (P9-12)
0
1
1
4 (P9-13)
1
0
0
5 (P9-14)
1
0
1
6 (P9-15)
1
1
0
7 (P9-16)
1
1
1
8 (P9-17)
P9-18 Input speed selection 0
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
"Bit 0" logic source for selecting the speed setpoint
P9-19 Input speed selection 1
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
"Bit 1" logic source for selecting the speed setpoint
P9-20 Input speed selection 2
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
P9-21–P9-23 Fixed speed selection input
When a fixed speed setpoint is to be used for the speed setpoint, you can select the
active fixed speed setpoint based on the status of these parameters. The following logic is used for selection:
170
P9-23
P9-22
P9-21
0
0
0
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Fixed setpoint speed
1 (P2-01)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
"Bit 2" logic source for selecting the speed setpoint
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
P9-23
P9-22
P9-21
0
0
1
2 (P2-02)
0
1
0
3 (P2-03)
0
1
1
4 (P2-04)
1
0
0
5 (P2-05)
1
0
1
6 (P2-06)
1
1
0
7 (P2-07)
1
1
1
8 (P2-08)
9
Fixed setpoint speed
P9-21 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 0
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies input source 0 for the fixed setpoint speed.
P9-22 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 1
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies input source 1 for the fixed setpoint speed.
P9-23 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 2
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8, On
Specifies input source 2 for the fixed setpoint speed.
P9-24 Positive jog mode input
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Specifies the signal source for operation in positive jog mode.
The jog speed is specified in parameter P2-01.
P9-25 Negative jog mode input
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Specifies the signal source for operation in negative jog mode.
The jog speed is specified in parameter P2-01.
P9-26 Reference travel enable input
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Specifies the source of the enable signal for the reference travel function.
P9-27 Reference cam input
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Specifies the source of the cam input.
P9-28 Motor potentiometer up input source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
171
9
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Specifies the source of the logic signal used to increase the speed setpoint with the
keypad/motorized potentiometer. When the specified signal source is logic 1, the
value increases by the ramp defined in P1-03.
P9-29 Motor potentiometer down input source
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Specifies the source of the logic signal used to decrease the speed setpoint with the
keypad/motorized potentiometer. When the specified signal source is logic 1, the
value decreases by the rate defined in P1-04.
P9-30 Positive limit switch CW
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
The parameter defines the digital input for the positive limit switch. The signal hat to
be wired safe against wire breakage as NC contact. Upon activation of the limit switch,
a 0 V level is present at the DI and the inverter reduces the speed along the ramp
P1-04 to 0 Hz.
As long as the enable persists at the inverter, the inverter stays enabled at 0 Hz.
The status of the limit switch is also depicted in the status word.
P9-31 Negative limit switch CCW
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
The parameter defines the digital input for the negative limit switch. The signal has to
be wired safe against wire breakage as NC contact. Upon activation of the limit switch,
a 0 V level is present at the DI and the inverter reduces the speed along the ramp
P1-04 to 0 Hz.
As long as the enable persists at the inverter, the inverter stays enabled at 0 Hz.
The status of the limit switch is also depicted in the status word.
P9-32 Enable second deceleration ramp, rapid stop ramp
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Specifies the source of the logic signal used to enable the rapid deceleration ramp
defined in P2-25.
P9-33 Fire mode/emergency mode input selection
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5. Specifies the source of the logic
signal used to enable fire mode/emergency mode. In this mode, the inverter ignores
all faults and/or disconnections and operates until total failure or power failure.
P9-34 PID fixed setpoint reference selection input 0
P9-35 PID fixed setpoint reference selection input 1
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
INFORMATION
Parameters P3-14 − P3-16 cannot be used while P9-34 and P9-35 are set to "OFF".
172
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Setting range: OFF, din-1, din-2, din-3, din-4, din-5, din-6, din-7, din-8
Technical data
Markings
10
Technical data
10.1
Markings
10
The following table lists all markings that can be given on a nameplate or attached to
the motor and an explanation of what they mean.
Mark
Meaning
CE mark to state compliance with the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
EU directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS) serves for limiting the use of hazardous
substances in electric and electronic equipment.
FS mark with code number to identify functional safety relevant components.
01
UL logo to confirm that a component is UL (Underwriters Laboratory)
tested, also valid for CSA in conjunction with the register number.
EAC mark (EurAsian Conformity)
Confirms compliance with the technical regulations of the economic and
customs union of Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Armenia.
RCM logo (Regulatory Compliance Mark).
Confirmation of compliance with technical regulations of the Australian
Communications and Media Authority ACMA.
All products meet the following international standards:
UL 508C power converter
•
EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012 Variable-speed electrical drives – part 3
•
EN ISO 13849-1 Safe Torque Off (STO) to PL d
•
Degree of protection according to NEMA 250, EN 60529
•
Flammability class according to UL 94
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
173
10
Technical data
Ambient conditions
10.2
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature range during -10 °C to +50 °C (IP20/NEMA 1)
operation
-10 °C to +40 °C (IP55/NEMA 12K)
(For PWM frequency 2 kHz)
-10 °C to +40 °C (IP66/NEMA 4X)
Derating depending on the ambient temperature
2.5%/°C to 60 °C for the following inverters with degree of protection
IP20/NEMA 1:
230 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
400 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
500 V: 0.75 – 15 kW
2.5%/°C to 50 °C for the following inverters with IP degree of protection
IP66/NEMA 4X:
230 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
400 V: 0.75 – 7.5 kW
500 V: 0.75 – 11 kW
1.5%/°C to 50 °C for the following inverters with IP degree of protection
IP55/NEMA 12K:
230 V: 5.5 – 75 kW
400 V: 11 – 160 kW
500 V: 15 – 110 kW
Storage temperature
-40 °C to +60 °C
Maximum installation altitude for
nominal operation
1000 m
Derating above 1000 m
1%/100 m to max. 2000 m with UL
1%/100 m to max. 4000 m without UL
Maximum relative humidity
95% (condensation not permitted)
Device designs
IP20/NEMA 1
IP55/NEMA 12K
22872051/EN – 09/2016
IP66/NEMA 4X
174
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Technical data
10.3
10
Technical data
The "Horsepower" (HP) specification is defined as follows:
10.3.1
•
200 – 240 V devices: NEC2002, table 430-150, 230 V
•
380 – 480 V devices: NEC2002, table 430-150, 460 V
•
500 – 600 V devices: NEC2002, table 430-150, 575 V
1-phase system AC 200 – 240 V
INFORMATION
The cable cross sections and fusing recommended below apply to the use of copper
conductors with PVC insulation laid in cable ducts at an ambient temperature of
25° C. Also comply with the regulations issued by specific countries and for specific
machines regarding power supply system and motor cable.
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C1 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
IP20/NEMA 1
MC LTP-B..
0008-2B1-4-00
0015-2B1-4-00
0022-2B1-4-00
Part number
18251382
18251528
18251641
IP66/NEMA 4X
MC LTP-B..
0008-2B1-4-10
0015-2B1-4-10
0022-2B1-4-10
Part number
18251390
18251536
18251668
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to
EN 50160
Line frequency fline
V
1 × AC 200 – 240 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
1.5
AWG
14
12
Line fuse
A
16
25 (35)1)
Nominal input current
A
8.5
13.9
19.5
kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
HP
1
2
3
Recommended power supply cable cross
section
2.5
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable Cu 75C
Maximum motor cable length shielded
V
A
3 × 20 - Vline
4.3
7
kHz
2/4/6/8/12/16
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
10.5
500
mm2
1.5
AWG
14
m
2.5
12
100
Maximum motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Size
2
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power section
W
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
27
mm²
10
Maximum device terminal cross section
Maximum control terminal cross section
8
22
45
AWG
8
mm²
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
66
1) Recommended values for UL compliance
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
175
10
Technical data
Technical data
10.3.2
3-phase system AC 200 – 240 V
INFORMATION
All inverters with a power supply of 3 × AC 200 – 240 V can also be operated with 1 ×
AC 200 – 240 V when observing a derating of 50% of the output current.
Power 0.75 – 5.5 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
IP20/NEMA 1
MC LTP-B.. 0008-2A3-4-00 0015-2A3-4-00 0022-2A3-4-00 0030-2A3-4-00 0040-2A3-4-00 0055-2A3-4-00
Part number
18251358
18251471
18251617
18251722
18251765
IP66/NEMA 4X
18251846
IP55/NEMA
12K
MC LTP-B.. 0008-2A3-4-10 0015-2A3-4-10 0022-2A3-4-10 0030-2A3-4-10 0040-2A3-4-10 0055-2A3-4-10
Part number
18251366
18251498
18251625
18251730
18251773
18251854
6.0
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline
according to EN 50160
V
Line frequency fline
Hz
3 × AC 200 – 240 ±10%
50 / 60 ±5%
Recommended power sup- mm2
ply cable cross section
AWG
1.5
2.5
4.0
16
14
12
10
1)
25 (35)
10
1)
Line fuse
A
16
20 (35)
Nominal input current
A
4.5
7.3
11
16.1
18.8
24.8
35
kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
HP
1
2
3
4
5
7.5
14
18
OUTPUT
Recommended motor
power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor
cable Cu 75C
Max. motor cable length
shielded
V
A
3 × 20 - Vline
4.3
7
kHz
10.5
2/4/6/8/12/16
1/min
24
2/4/6/8
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm2
1.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
AWG
16
14
12
10
m
100
Max. motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
2
8/112)
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power
section
W
8
Minimum braking resistance
value
Ω
27
22
22
45
66
90
120
165
Maximum device terminal
cross section
mm2
10
10 / 162)
AWG
8
8/62)
Maximum control terminal
cross section
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
1) Recommended values for UL compliance
2) IP20 housing: Size 3 / IP55 housing: Size 4
176
3 / 42)
3
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Size
Technical data
Technical data
10
Power 7.5 – 18.5 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
0075-2A3-4-10
0110-2A3-4-10
0150-2A3-4-10
0185-2A3-4-10
Part number
18251919
18251978
18252036
18252060
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according
to EN 50160
Line frequency fline
V
3 × AC 200 – 240 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
10
16
25
AWG
8
6
4
2
Line fuse
A
50
63
80
100
Nominal input current
A
40
47.1
62.4
74.1
kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
HP
10
15
20
25
61
72
Recommended power supply cable
cross section
35
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable Cu
75C
Maximum motor cable length shielded
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
39
46
kHz
2/4/6/8/12
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
2
AWG
10
16
25
35
8
6
4
2
m
100
Maximum motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power section
W
225
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
22
Maximum device terminal cross
section
5
11.3
330
450
555
12
mm2
16
AWG
6
6
35
2
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal cross
section
4
11
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
177
10
Technical data
Technical data
Power 22 – 45 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
22
30
37
45
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
0220-2A3-4-10
0300-2A3-4-10
0370-2A3-4-10
0450-2A3-4-10
Part number
18252087
18252117
18252141
18252176
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according
to EN 50160
Line frequency fline
Recommended power supply cable
cross section
V
3 × AC 200 – 240 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
35
50
95
AWG
2
1
3 / 0
Line fuse
A
100
150
Nominal input current
A
92.3
112.7
153.5
200
183.8
kW
22
30
37
45
HP
30
40
50
60
150
180
2/4/6
2/4
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable Cu
75C
Maximum motor cable length shielded
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
90
kHz
110
2/4/6/8
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
2
AWG
35
50
95
2
1
3 / 0
m
100
Maximum motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
6
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
11.6
Nominal power loss power section
W
660
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
6
1110
1350
3
M10 stud with nut max. 95 mm2
M8 braking resistor connector max. 70 mm2
Crimping cable lug DIN 46235
Maximum device terminal cross
section
AWG
mm
2
AWG
0.05 – 2.5
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal cross
section
900
178
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Technical data
10
Power 55 – 75 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
55
75
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
0550-2A3-4-10
0750-2A3-4-10
Part number
18252206
18252230
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to EN 50160
V
Line frequency fline
Hz
3 × AC 200 – 240 ±10%
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
120
AWG
4 / 0
–
Line fuse
A
250
315
Nominal input current
A
206.2
252.8
kW
55
75
HP
75
100
Recommended power supply cable cross section
150
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
V
Output current
A
202
248
kHz
2/4/6/8
2/4/6
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable Cu 75C
Maximum motor cable length shielded
3 × 20 - Vline
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm2
120
AWG
4 / 0
m
150
–
100
Maximum motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
7
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power section
W
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
1650
2250
3
M10 stud with nut max. 95 mm2
M8 braking resistor connector max. 70 mm2
Crimping cable lug DIN 46235
Maximum device terminal cross section
AWG
-
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal cross section
11.9
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
179
10
Technical data
Technical data
10.3.3
3-phase system AC 380 – 480 V
Power 0.75 – 11 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
7.5
11
IP20/NEMA 1
MC LTP-B.. 0008-5A3-4-00 0015-5A3-4-00 0022-5A3-4-00 0040-5A3-4-00 0055-5A3-4-00 0075-5A3-4-00 0110-5A3-4-00
Part number
18251412
18251552
18251684
18251803
18251870
18251927
IP66/NEMA 4X
18251986
IP55/NEMA
12K
MC LTP-B.. 0008-5A3-4-10 0015-5A3-4-10 0022-5A3-4-10 0040-5A3-4-10 0055-5A3-4-10 0075-5A3-4-10 0110-5A3-4-10
Part number
18251420
18251560
18251692
18251811
18251889
18251935
18251994
INPUT
Nominal line
voltage Vline according to
EN 50160
Line frequency fline
V
3 × AC 380 – 480 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
1.5
2.5
6
AWG
16
14
10
Line fuse
A
10
Nominal input current
A
2.4
4.3
Recommended
motor power
kW
0.75
HP
1
Output voltage
Vmotor
V
Recommended
power supply
cable cross section
16 (15)1)
16
20
35
6.1
9.8
14.6
18.1
24.7
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
7.5
11
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
OUTPUT
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
A
3 × 20 - Vline
2.2
4.1
kHz
5.8
9.5
14
2/4/6/8/12/16
18
2/4/6/8/12
24
2/4/6/8
1/min
Maximum output
frequency
Hz
Cross section of
motor cable Cu
75C
mm2
1.5
2.5
6
AWG
16
14
10
Max. motor cable
length shielded
500
m
100
Max. motor cable
length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
3
3 / 42)
8
10
10/16.72)
Nominal power
loss 24 V
W
Nominal power
loss power section
W
Minimum braking
resistance value
Ω
Maximum device
terminal cross
section
mm2
10
10 / 162)
AWG
8
8/62)
Maximum control
terminal cross
section
22
45
66
120
68
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
2) IP20 housing: Size 3 / IP55 housing: Size 4
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
165
225
330
39
mm2
1) Recommended values for UL compliance
180
2
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Size
Technical data
Technical data
10
Power 15 – 37 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
0150-5A3-4-10
0185-5A3-4-10
0220-5A3-4-10
0300-5A3-4-10
0370-5A3-4-10
Part number
18252044
18252079
18252095
18252125
18252168
35
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to EN 50160
V
Line frequency fline
Hz
3 × AC 380 – 480 ±10%
50 / 60 ±5%
Recommended power supply mm2
cable cross section
AWG
6
10
16
25
10
8
6
4
2
Line fuse
A
35
50
63
80
100
Nominal input current
A
30.8
40
47.1
62.8
73.8
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
HP
20
25
30
40
50
61
72
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable
Cu 75C
Max. motor cable length
shielded
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
30
39
46
kHz
2/4/6/8/12
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
2
AWG
6
10
16
25
35
10
8
6
4
2
m
100
Max. motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
4
5
16.7
19.8
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power
section
W
Minimum braking resistance
value
Ω
22
12
mm2
16
35
AWG
6
2
Maximum device terminal
cross section
mm
2
AWG
555
660
900
1110
0.05 – 2.5
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal
cross section
450
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
181
10
Technical data
Technical data
Power 45 – 90 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
45
55
75
90
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
0450-5A3-4-10
0550-5A3-4-10
0750-5A3-4-10
0900-5A3-4-10
Part number
18252184
18252214
18252249
18252273
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to EN 50160
Line frequency fline
Recommended power supply
cable cross section
V
3 × AC 380 – 480 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
50
70
95
120
AWG
1
2 / 0
3 / 0
4 / 0
Line fuse
A
125
150
200
250
Nominal input current
A
92.2
112.5
153.2
183.7
kW
45
55
75
90
HP
60
75
100
150
90
110
150
180
2/4/6
2/4
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
V
Output current
A
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable
Cu 75C
Max. motor cable length
shielded
3 × 20 - Vline
kHz
2/4/6/8
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
2
AWG
50
70
95
120
1
2 / 0
3 / 0
4 / 0
2250
2700
m
100
Max. motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
6
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power
section
W
Minimum braking resistance
value
Ω
1350
1650
6
M10 stud with nut max. 95 mm2
M8 braking resistor connector max. 70 mm2
Crimping cable lug DIN 46235
Maximum device terminal
cross section
AWG
-
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal
cross section
31.1
182
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Technical data
10
Power 110 – 160 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class C2 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
110
132
160
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B..
1100-5A3-4-10
1320-5A3-4-10
1600-5A3-4-10
Part number
18252303
18252311
18252346
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to
EN 50160
Line frequency fline
V
3 × AC 380 – 480 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
120
150
AWG
4 / 0
–
–
Line fuse
A
250
315
355
Nominal input current
A
205.9
244.5
307.8
kW
110
132
160
HP
175
200
250
Recommended power supply cable cross
section
185
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor cable Cu 75C
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
202
240
302
kHz
2/4/6/8
2/4/6
2/4
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
2
AWG
Maximum motor cable length shielded
120
150
185
4 / 0
–
–
m
100
Maximum motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
7
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power section
W
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
3300
3960
4800
6
M10 stud with nut max. 95 mm2
M8 braking resistor connector max. 70 mm2
Crimping cable lug DIN 46235
Maximum device terminal cross section
AWG
-
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Maximum control terminal cross section
38.5
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
183
10
Technical data
Technical data
10.3.4
3-phase system AC 500 – 600 V
Power 0.75 – 5.5 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class 0 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
IP20/NEMA 1
MC LTP-B.. 0008-603-4-00
Part number
0015-603-4-00
0022-603-4-00
0040-603-4-00
0055-603-4-00
18251587
18251714
18410812
18410839
18251447
IP66/NEMA 4X
MC LTP-B.. 0008-603-4-10
Part number
0015-603-4-10
0022-603-4-10
0040-603-4-10
0055-603-4-10
18251595
18410804
18410820
18410847
18251455
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline according to EN 50160
Line frequency fline
Recommended power supply
cable cross section
V
3 × AC 500 – 600 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
1.5
AWG
16
2.5
14
10 / (6)1)
16 / (15)1)
Line fuse
A
10
Nominal input current
A
2.5
3.7
4.9
7.8
10.8
kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
HP
1
2
3
5
7.5
6.5
9
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
2.1
3.1
4.1
kHz
2/4/6/8/12
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
Cross section of motor cable Cu
75C
mm2
1.5
AWG
16
Max. motor cable length shielded
m
2.5
14
100
Max. motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
2
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power section
W
Minimum braking resistance
value
Ω
68
mm2
10
AWG
8
Maximum device terminal cross
section
Maximum control terminal cross
section
mm
8
22
2
AWG
45
66
120
165
0.05 – 2.5
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1) Recommended values for UL compliance in brackets
184
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Technical data
10
Power 7.5 – 30 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class 0 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
IP20/NEMA 1
MC LTP-B.. 0075-603-4-00 0110-603-4-00 0150-603-4-00
-
-
-
Part number
-
-
-
18410855
18410863
18410871
IP66/NEMA 4X
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B.. 0075-603-4-10 0110-603-4-10 0150-603-4-10 0185-603-4-10 0220-603-4-10 0300-603-4-10
Part number
18251951
18252028
18252052
18410898
18252109
18252133
14
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline
according to EN 50160
Line frequency fline
V
3 × AC 500 – 600 ±10%
Hz
50 / 60 ±5%
mm2
2.5
4
6
10
AWG
14
12
10
8
6
Line fuse
A
20
25 / (30)1)
35
40 / (45)1)
50 / (60)1)
63 / (70)1)
Nominal input current
A
14.4
20.6
26.7
34
41.2
49.5
kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
HP
10
15
20
25
30
40
34
43
Recommended power supply cable cross section
OUTPUT
Recommended motor
power
Output voltage Vmotor
V
Output current
A
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor
cable Cu 75C
Max. motor cable length
shielded
3 × 20 - Vline
12
17
22
28
kHz
2/4/6/8/12
1/min
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm2
2.5
4
6
10
14
AWG
14
12
10
8
6
m
100
Max. motor cable length unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power
section
W
Minimum braking resistance
value
Ω
Maximum device terminal
cross section
Maximum control terminal
cross section
3
3 / 42)
4
10
10/16.72)
16.7
225
330
450
555
39
660
900
22
mm2
10
10 / 162)
16
AWG
8
8/62)
6
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
1) Recommended values for UL compliance in brackets
22872051/EN – 09/2016
2) IP20 housing: Size 3 / IP55 housing: Size 4
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
185
10
Technical data
Technical data
Power 37 – 110 kW
MOVITRAC® LTPB – EMC filter class 0 according to EN 61800-3
Power in kW
37
45
55
75
90
110
IP55/NEMA 12K
MC LTP-B.. 0370-603-4-10 0450-603-4-10 0550-603-4-10 0750-603-4-10 0900-603-4-10 1100-603-4-10
Part number
18410901
18252192
18252222
18252257
18252281
18410928
INPUT
Nominal line voltage Vline
according to EN 50160
V
Line frequency fline
Hz
3 × AC 500 – 600 ±10%
50 / 60 ±5%
Recommended power sup- mm2
ply cable cross section
AWG
25
35
50
70
95
4
2
1
2 / 0
3 / 0
Line fuse
A
80
100
125/(150)1)
160/(175)1)
200
Nominal input current
A
62.2
75.8
90.9
108.2
127.7
158.4
kW
37
45
55
75
90
110
HP
50
60
75
100
125
150
OUTPUT
Recommended motor
power
Output voltage Vmotor
Output current
PWM frequency
Speed range
Maximum output frequency
Cross section of motor
cable Cu 75C
Max. motor cable length
shielded
V
3 × 20 - Vline
A
54
kHz
65
78
2/4/6/8/12
105
-30000 – 0 – +30000
Hz
500
mm
AWG
150
2/4/6
1/min
2
130
2/4/6/8
25
35
50
70
95
4
2
1
2 / 0
3 / 0
2700
3300
m
100
Max. motor cable length
unshielded
150
GENERAL INFORMATION
Size
5
6
19.8
31.1
Nominal power loss 24 V
W
Nominal power loss power
section
W
Minimum braking resistance value
Ω
22
mm2
35
AWG
2
Maximum device terminal
cross section
Maximum control terminal
cross section
1110
1350
1650
2250
12
6
M10 stud with nut max. 95 mm2
M8 braking resistor connector max. 70 mm2
Crimping cable lug DIN 46235
-
mm2
0.05 – 2.5
AWG
30 – 12
22872051/EN – 09/2016
1) Recommended values for UL compliance
186
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Input voltage ranges
10.4
10
Input voltage ranges
Depending on the model, the inverters are designed for direct connection to the following voltage sources:
MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Nominal voltage according to EN 50160
Power
Connection
type
Rated frequency
200 – 240 V ± 10%
0.75 – 2.2 kW
1-phase*
50 – 60 Hz ± 5%
200 – 240 V ± 10%
All
3-phase
380 – 480 V ± 10%
500 – 600 V ± 10%
Units that are connected to a 3-phase supply system are designed for a maximum
power grid imbalance of 3% between the phases. For supply systems with a power
grid imbalance of more than 3% (for example, in India and parts of the Asia-Pacific region including China), SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you use input chokes.
INFORMATION
*Single-phase inverters can also be connected to 2 phases of a 3-phase power supply system of 200 – 240 V.
10.5
Overload capacity
The inverter supplies a constant output current of 100%.
Inverter
Overload capacity based on nominal inverter
current
60 seconds
2 seconds
150%
175%
60 seconds
2 seconds
Asynchronous motors
150%
175%
Synchronous motors
200%
250%1)
60 seconds
2 seconds
MGF..2-DSM with MC LTP-B 0015-5A3-4-xx
200%
220%
MGF..4-DSM with MC LTP-B 0022-5A3-4-xx
190%
220%
MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Motors
Overload capacity based on nominal motor
current
1) Only 200% for inverters with 5.5 kW.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Overload capacity based on nominal motor
current
1)
MGF..4/XT-DSM with MC LTP-B 0040-5A3-4xx
%
1)
%1)
1) In preparation.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
187
10
Technical data
Housing variants and dimensions
10.6
Housing variants and dimensions
10.6.1
Housing variants
The inverter is available with the following housing variants:
•
IP20/NEMA-1 housing for use in control cabinets
•
IP55/NEMA-12K housing
•
IP66/NEMA-4X housing
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The housings with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K and IP66/NEMA 4X are protected against humidity and dust. This allows for operating the inverter indoors under
difficult conditions. The inverter functions are identical.
188
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Housing variants and dimensions
10.6.2
10
Dimensions
Inverters with degree of protection IP20/NEMA 1
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 5.5 kW
400 V
0.75 – 11 kW
575 V
0.75 – 15 kW
c
B
C
d
a
b
A
®
MOVITRAC LTP-B
-DC L1/L L2/N L3
+
BR
U
V
W
9007204020723723
Dimension
230 V: 0.75 – 2.2 kW 230 V: 3 – 5.5 kW
400 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
400 V: 5.5 – 11 kW
575 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW 575 V: 7.5 – 15 kW
Height (A)
mm
221
261
Width (B)
mm
110
131
Depth (C)
mm
185
205
kg
1.8
3.5
a
mm
63.0
80.0
b
mm
209
247
c
mm
23
25.5
d
mm
7.00
7.75
Weight
4 × M4
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Recommended screw size
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
189
10
Technical data
Housing variants and dimensions
10.6.3
Dimensions
Inverters with degree of protection IP66/NEMA 4X
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
230 V
0.75 – 4 kW
400 V
0.75 – 7.5 kW
575 V
0.75 – 11 kW
C
a
B
d
b
A
d
c
9007204021711243
Dimension
230 V: 0.75 – 2.2 kW
230 V: 3 – 4 kW
400 V: 0.75 – 4 kW
400 V: 5.5 – 7.5 kW
575 V: 0.75 – 5.5 kW
575 V: 7.5 – 11 kW
Height (A)
mm
257
310
Width (B)
mm
188
211
Depth (C)
mm
239
270
kg
4.8
7.3
a
mm
178
200
b
mm
200
252
c
mm
5
5.5
d
mm
28.5
29
Weight
4 × M4
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Recommended screw size
190
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Technical data
Housing variants and dimensions
10
Inverters with degree of protection IP55/NEMA 12K
The following inverters have the housing shown below:
Nominal line voltage
Power of the inverter
5.5 – 75 kW
400 V
11 – 160 kW
575 V
15 – 110 kW
d
b
A
230 V
a
Dimension
C
B
230 V: 5.5 – 11 kW
230 V: 15 – 18.5 kW 230 V: 22 – 45 kW
400 V: 11 – 22 kW
400 V: 30 – 37 kW
575 V: 15 – 30 kW
575 V: 37 – 45 kW
230 V: 55 – 75 kW
400 V: 45 – 90 kW
400 V: 110 – 160
575 V: 55 – 110 kW kW
Height (A)
mm
450
540
865
1280
Width (B)
mm
171
235
330
330
Depth (C)
mm
235
268
335
365
kg
11.5
22.5
47
80
a
mm
110
175
200
200
b
mm
423
520
840
1255
c
mm
61
60
130
130
d
mm
8
8
10
10
Weight
4 × M8
4 × M10
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Recommended
screw size
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
191
10
Technical data
Protection function
10.7
Protection function
•
Output short circuit, phase-phase, phase-ground
•
Output overcurrent
•
Overload protection
– Inverter responds to overload as described in chapter "Overload
capacity" (→ 2 187).
•
Overvoltage fault
– Set to 123% of the maximum nominal line voltage of the inverter.
•
Undervoltage fault
•
Overtemperature fault
•
Undertemperature fault
– The inverter is shut down at a temperature of under -10 °C.
•
Line phase failure
– A running inverter shuts down when one phase of a three-phase system fails
for longer than 15 seconds.
Thermal motor overload protection according to NEC (National Electrical Code,
US).
•
Evaluation of TF, TH, KTY84 and PT1000
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
192
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Functional safety (STO)
Integrated safety technology
11
11
Functional safety (STO)
Safe Torque Off is abbreviated to STO for the remainder of this section.
11.1
Integrated safety technology
The safety technology of MOVITRAC® LTP-B described below has been developed
and tested in accordance with the following safety requirements:
Underlying standards
Safety class
EN 61800-5-2:2007
SIL 2
EN ISO 13849-1:2006
PL d
EN 61508:2010 part 1 – 7
SIL 2
EN 60204-1:2006
Stop category 0
EN 62061:2005
SIL CL 2
STO certification was conducted by TÜV Rheinland. It is valid only for devices that
have the TÜV logo imprinted on the nameplate. Copies of the TÜV certificate can be
obtained from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
11.1.1
Safe condition
For the safety-related use of MOVITRAC® LTP-B, "Safe Torque Off" is defined as a
safe state. The underlying safety concept is based on this.
11.1.2
Safety concept
•
In case of danger, any potential risk to a machine must be eliminated as quickly as
possible. Bringing the unit to a standstill and preventing a restart is generally the
safe state for preventing dangerous movements.
•
The STO function is available irrespective of the operating mode or parameter settings.
•
It is possible to connect an external safety relay to the frequency inverter. This
safety relay activates the STO function when a connected control device (for example, EMERGENCY STOP button with a latching function) is activated. The motor coasts to a halt and is now in the "Safe Torque Off" state.
•
The active STO function prevents the frequency inverter from supplying a torquegenerating rotating field to the motor.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Safe disconnection function (STO)
The safe disconnection function locks the frequency inverter's performance level, thus
preventing it from supplying a torque-generating rotating field to the motor. The motor
coasts to a halt.
Restarting the motor is possible only if:
•
A voltage of 24 V is present between STO+ and STO-, as shown in chapter Overview of signal terminals.
•
All error messages are acknowledged.
Using the STO function makes it possible to integrate the drive into a safety system in
which the STO function must be fully compliant.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
193
11
Functional safety (STO)
Integrated safety technology
The STO function makes the use of electro-mechanical protection with self-checking
auxiliary contacts for implementing safety functions redundant.
Safe Torque Off function
INFORMATION
The STO function does not prevent the frequency inverter from restarting unintentionally. An automatic restart may occur as soon as the STO inputs obtain a valid signal
(depending on the parameter settings). For this reason, do not use this function to
carry out brief non-electrical work (for example, cleaning or maintenance).
The STO function integrated into the frequency inverter meets the definition of "Safe
Torque Off" in accordance with IEC 61800-5-2:2007.
The STO function corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance with category 0
(emergency off) of IEC 60204-1. If the STO function is activated, the motor coasts to a
stop. This stop procedure must be in accordance with the system that drives the motor.
The STO function is recognized as a fail-safe method even if the STO signal is not
present and an individual fault occurs in the drive. The frequency inverter is tested in
accordance with the safety standards specified below:
SIL
PFHD
Safety integ- Probability of dangerous failure
rity level
per hour
EN 61800-5:-2
1.23 x 10-9 1/h
(0.12% of SIL 2)
2
SFF
Safe failure
fraction
Assumed service life
50%
20 years
PL
Performance Level
CCF (%)
Common cause failure
PL d
1
EN ISO 13849‑1
SILCL
EN 62061
SILCL 2
Note: The above values are not achieved if the frequency inverter is installed in an environment whose limit values lie outside the values specified in chapter "Ambient
conditions" (→ 2 174).
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Some applications require additional measures in order to satisfy the requirements of
the system's safety function. The STO function does not have a motor brake. If a motor brake is required, it is necessary to use a delayed safety relay and/or a mechanical braking device or similar. It is necessary to establish which protective function is
required when braking. The brake control in the frequency inverter has not been evaluated from a safety technology perspective and therefore cannot be used to safely
control the brake without the use of additional measures.
194
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Functional safety (STO)
Integrated safety technology
11
Safety functions
The following figure shows the STO function:
v
t
t1
2463228171
v
t
t1
Speed
Time
Time at which STO is triggered
Switch-off range
STO status and diagnostics
Frequency inverter display
Frequency inverter display "Inhibit": The STO function is active due to signals
present at the safety inputs. If, at the same time, the frequency inverter switches to a
fault status, the relevant error message is displayed instead of "Inhibit".
Frequency inverter display "STo-F": See chapter "Error codes" (→ 2 87).
Frequency inverter output relay
Frequency inverter relay 1: If P2-15 is set to "9", the relay opens when the STO function is activated.
Frequency inverter relay 2: If P2-18 is set to "9", the relay opens when the STO function is activated.
Response times of STO function
The entire response time is the time from when a safety-relevant event occurs on the
system components (total) until they are in a safe state (stop category 0 in accordance
with IEC 60204-1).
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Response time
Description
< 1 ms
From the time
• when the STO inputs are no longer energized.
Until the time
• when the motor can no longer generate torque.
< 20 ms
From the time
• when the STO inputs are no longer energized.
Until the time
• when the STO monitoring status changes.
< 20 ms
From detection
• of a fault in the STO circuit.
Until display
• of the fault in the frequency inverter display or the digital output.
Status: "Frequency inverter fault"
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
195
11
Functional safety (STO)
Integrated safety technology
11.1.3
Restrictions
WARNING
The safety concept is only suitable for performing mechanical work on the system/
machine components.
If the STO signal is disconnected, the line voltage is still present at the frequency inverter DC link.
•
•
Before working on the electric part of the drive system, disconnect it from the
supply system using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it
against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply.
•
The STO function does not prevent an unintentional restart. As soon as the STO
inputs receive the corresponding signal, the drive can restart automatically. Do
not use the STO function for maintenance work.
The STO function does not have a motor brake. If the motor coasts to a halt, this
must not cause a further hazard. Take this into account during a risk assessment
of the system/machine. Additional safety measures (for example, safety brake system) may need to be implemented.
In the case of application-specific safety functions that require active deceleration
(braking) of a dangerous movement, the frequency inverter cannot be used without
an additional brake system.
•
When using a permanent-field motor, a multiple output stage error – which is extremely rare – may cause the rotor to rotate by 180°/p (p = number of pole pairs).
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The brake is always applied if a safety-related disconnection of the DC 24 V supply
voltage occurs at terminal 12 (STO activated). The brake control in the frequency inverter is not safety-related.
196
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Functional safety (STO)
Safety conditions
11.2
11
Safety conditions
The requirement for safe operation is that the safety functions of the frequency inverter are properly integrated into an application-specific higher-level safety function.
In each case, a system/machine-specific risk assessment must be carried out by the
system/machine manufacturer and taken into account when using the drive system
with a frequency inverter.
The system/machine manufacturer and the operator are responsible for ensuring that
the system/machine complies with the relevant safety regulations.
Approved devices:
All available MOVITRAC® LTP-B inverters have the STO function.
The requirements below are mandatory when installing and operating the frequency
inverter in safety-related applications.
11.2.1
Storage requirements
To avoid accidental damage, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends keeping the inverter in
its original packaging until you are going to install it. The storage location must be dry
and clean. The temperature range at the storage location must be between –40°C and
+ 60°C.
11.2.2
Installation requirements
NOTICE
The STO wiring must be protected against accidental short circuits or external influences. Otherwise, it may cause the STO input signal to fail.
In addition to the wiring guidelines for the STO circuit, section "Electromagnetic
compatibility" (→ 2 38) must also be observed.
Shielded twisted-pair cables are always recommended here.
Requirements:
•
The safety-related DC 24 V supply voltage must be EMC-compliant and routed as
follows:
– Outside an electrical installation space, shielded cables must be routed permanently (fixed) and protected against external damage, or other equivalent
measures have to be taken.
– Inside an electrical installation space: Individual conductors can be routed.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
– Adhere to the relevant regulations in force for the application.
•
Make sure that you apply shielding for the safety-related DC 24 V supply cable at
both ends.
•
Power cables and safety-related control cables must be installed in separate
cables.
•
Make sure that no parasitic voltages can be generated in the safety-related control
cables.
•
The wiring technology used must comply with EN 60204-1.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
197
11
Functional safety (STO)
Safety conditions
•
Use only grounded voltage sources with safe isolation (PELV) according to
VDE0100 and EN 60204-1. In case of a single fault, the voltage between the outputs or between any output and grounded parts must not exceed a DC voltage of
60 V.
•
The safety-related DC 24 V supply voltage may not be used for feedback.
•
You can supply power to the 24 V STO input either via an external 24 V supply or
via the internal 24 V supply of the inverter. If an external voltage source is used, its
cable length to the inverter must not exceed 25 meters.
– Nominal voltage: DC +24 V
– STO Logic High: DC 18 – 30 V (Safe Torque Off in standby)
– Maximum current consumption: 100 mA
•
When planning the installation, observe the technical data of the frequency inverter.
•
Observe the values specified for safety components when designing the safety circuits.
•
Frequency inverters with degree of protection IP20 must be installed in an IP54
control cabinet (minimum requirement) in an environment with degree of pollution
1 or 2.
•
The safe 24 V must be connected between the safety relay and STO+ input in
such a way that a fault can be ruled out.
The fault assumption "short circuit between any two conductors" can be excluded
in accordance with EN ISO 13849-2: 2008 under the following conditions:
The conductors are:
– Permanently (fixed) installed and protected against external damage (for example, using a cable duct or armored conduit)
– Installed in different light plastic-sheathed cables in an electrical installation
space provided that both the lines and the installation space meet the relevant
requirements, see EN 60204-1
– Protected individually by a ground connection
The fault assumption "short circuit between any conductor and an exposed conductive part or ground or a protective conductor" can be excluded under the following condition:
22872051/EN – 09/2016
– Short circuits between a conductor and any exposed conductive part within an
installation space.
198
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Functional safety (STO)
Safety conditions
11.2.3
11
Requirements on the external safety controller
[6]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2] U
[5]
18014400103440907
[1]
Safety relay with approval
[2]
DC 24 V voltage supply
[3]
Fuses in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications of the safety relay
[4]
Safety-related DC 24 V voltage supply
[5]
Reset button for manual reset
[6]
Approved EMERGENCY STOP actuating device
A safety relay can be used as an alternative to a safety controller. The following requirements apply analogously:
•
The safety controller and all other safety-related subsystems must be approved for
at least that safety class which is required in the overall system for the respective,
application-related safety function.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
The following table shows an example of the required safety class of the safety
controller:
Application
Safety controller requirements
Performance level d in accordance with
EN ISO 13849-1
Performance level d in accordance with
EN ISO 13849-1
SIL 2 in accordance with EN 61508
•
The wiring of the safety controller must be suitable for the required safety class
(see manufacturer documentation).
– When disconnected, test pulses on the supply cable are not permitted.
•
The values specified for the safety controller must be strictly adhered to when
designing the circuit.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
199
11
Functional safety (STO)
Safety conditions
•
The switching capacity of the safety relays or the relay outputs of the safety controller must, at the very least, correspond to the maximum permitted, limited output
current of the 24 V supply voltage.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions concerning the permitted contact loads
and fusing that may be required for the safety contacts. If the manufacturer does
not provide any specific information on this matter, the contacts must be protected
with 0.6 times the nominal value of the maximum contact load specified by the
manufacturer.
•
To ensure protection against an unintentional restart in accordance with EN 1037,
the safe control system must be designed and connected in such a way that resetting the control device alone does not result in a restart. In other words, a restart
may only be carried out after the safety circuit has been manually reset.
INFORMATION
It is not possible to control the STO inputs via pulsed signals (for example, self-testing digital outputs of safety controllers).
11.2.4
Requirements for safety relays
The requirements of the manufacturers of safety relays, such as protecting the output
contacts against welding or other safety components, must be strictly observed. For
cable routing, the basic requirements apply as described in this publication.
Other instructions by the manufacturer on the use of safety relays for specific applications must also be observed.
Choose the safety relay in such a way that it has at least the same safety standards
as the required PLd/SIL of the application.
11.2.5
Minimum requirements
SIL2 or PLd SC3 or higher
(with force-guided contacts)
Number of output contacts
2 independent
Rated switching voltage
DC 30 V
Switching current
100 mA
Requirements on startup
•
To validate the implemented safety functions, they must be documented and
checked after successful startup (validation).
Observe the limitations for safety functions in chapter "Limitations" (→ 2 196) for
this. Non-safety-related parts and components that affect the result of the validation (e.g. motor brake) must be deactivated, if necessary.
11.2.6
200
For using MOVITRAC® LTP-B in safety-relevant applications, it is essential that
you perform and record startup checks for the disconnecting device and correct
wiring.
Requirements on operation
•
Operation is only allowed within the limits specified in the data sheets. This principle applies to the external safety controller as well as MOVITRAC® LTP-B and
approved options.
•
The fans must be able to rotate freely. The heat sink must be kept clear of dust
and dirt.
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
•
Functional safety (STO)
Safety conditions
•
The space in which the inverter is installed must be free of dust and condensation.
Check the fans and air filters regularly to ensure that they are working properly.
•
All electrical connections and the correct tightening torque for the terminals must
be checked regularly.
•
Check power cables for damage caused by heat.
11
Testing the STO function
Before starting up the system, perform the following tests to ensure that the STO function is working properly. Here, the configured enable source must be taken into account in accordance with the settings in P1-15.
•
1. Initial situation:
The frequency inverter is not enabled. Therefore, the motor is at a standstill.
– The STO inputs are no longer energized ("Inhibit" displayed on the frequency
inverter display).
– Enable the frequency inverter. Since the STO inputs continue to not be energized, "Inhibit" continues to be displayed on the frequency inverter display.
•
2. Initial situation:
The frequency inverter is enabled. The motor rotates.
– Disconnect the STO inputs from the power supply.
– Check whether "Inhibit" is displayed on the frequency inverter display, the motor is stopped, and the operation runs in accordance with sections "Safe
disconnection function (STO)" (→ 2 193) and "STO status and
diagnostics" (→ 2 195).
Maintaining the STO function
Test the safety functions at regular intervals (at least once per year) to ensure that
they are working properly. The test intervals must be specified on the basis of the risk
assessment.
Furthermore, test the integrity of the STO function after each change to the safety system or following any maintenance work.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
If error messages occur, determine their significance under section "Service and error
codes" (→ 2 109).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
201
11
Functional safety (STO)
Connection variants
11.3
Connection variants
11.3.1
General information
Generally, all the connection variants listed in this documentation are permitted for
safety-relevant applications as long as the basic safety concept is fulfilled. This means
you have to make sure that the DC 24 V safety inputs are operated by an external
safety relay or a safety controller, thus preventing an automatic restart.
All safety conditions mentioned in chapters 2, 3 and 4 of the present documentation
must be met for the basic selection, installation, and application of the safety components (for example, safety relay, EMERGENCY STOP switch, and so on), and the approved connection variants.
The wiring diagrams are block diagrams whose only purpose is to show the safety
function(s) with the relevant components. Circuit-related measures, which usually always have to be implemented additionally, are not shown in the diagrams to enhance
clarity. Such measures are taken, for example, to ensure protection against contact, to
handle overvoltage and undervoltage, to detect insulation faults, line-to-ground faults
and short circuits, which can occur on externally installed lines, or to ensure the necessary immunity against electromagnetic interference.
Connections to MOVITRAC® LTP-B
DI 3
+10 V
AI 1 / DI 4
0V
AO 1 / DO 1
0V
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
STO–
DI 2
2
STO+
DI 1
1
AI 2 / DI 5
+24 VIO
AO 2 / DO 2
The following illustration shows an overview of the signal terminals.
22872051/EN – 09/2016
7952931339
202
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Functional safety (STO)
Connection variants
11.3.2
11
Disconnection of a single drive
STO according to PL d (EN ISO 13849-1)
The procedure is as follows:
•
The STO input 12 is disconnected.
•
The motor coasts to a halt, if no brake is installed.
STO – Safe Torque Off (EN 61800-5-2)
12 *
n
t
t
18014406471159051
*
n
Safety input (terminal 12)
Speed
INFORMATION
The displayed STO disconnections can be used up to PL d according to
EN ISO 13849-1 observing chapter "Requirements on safety relays" (→ 2 200).
Digital control with safety relay with external 24 V supply
Supply
system
Higher-level
controller
+24 V
GND
Emergency
stop
Stop
Start
PLC
IN
OUT
LTP-B
main terminals
Emergency stop
checkback
Safety relay
Reset
2
1 = Enable
0 = Stop
7
0V
12
STO+
13
STO -
22872051/EN – 09/2016
36028805542448523
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
203
11
Functional safety (STO)
Connection variants
Digital control with safety relay with internal 24 V supply
Supply
system
+24 V
Emergency
stop
Stop
Start
Higher-level
controller
PLC
IN
OUT
LTP-B
main terminals
Emergency stop
checkback
Safety relay
1
24 V
2
1 = Enable
0 = Stop
7
0V
Reset
12
STO+
13
STO -
36028805542458635
INFORMATION
With single-channel disconnection, you have to make certain fault assumptions and
provide for corresponding fault exclusions. Observe chapter "Requirements on safety
relays" (→ 2 200).
SS1(c) according to PL d (EN ISO 13849-1)
The procedure is as follows:
•
Terminal 2 is disconnected, e.g. in case of an emergency stop/halt.
•
During the safety time interval t1, the motor decelerates to a complete stop along
the ramp.
•
After t1 has elapsed, the safety input disconnects terminal 12. The safety time interval t1 must be sufficient for the motor to reach a complete stop.
SS1(c) – Safe Stop 1 (EN 61800-5-2)
2*
12**
t
n
t
t1
t
*
**
n
Digital input 1 (terminal 2)
Safety input (terminal 12)
Speed
INFORMATION
The displayed SS1(c) disconnections can be used up to PL d according to
EN ISO 13849-1 observing chapter "Requirements on safety relays" (→ 2 200).
204
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
18014407035653003
Functional safety (STO)
Connection variants
11
Digital control with safety relay with external 24 V supply
Supply
system
Higher-level
controller
+24 V
GND
Emergency
stop
Stop
Start
PLC
IN
OUT
LTP-B
main terminals
Emergency stop
checkback
Reset
Safety relay
2
1 = Enable
0 = Stop
7
0V
t1
12
STO+
13
STO -
27021606288081419
Digital control with safety relay with internal 24 V supply
Supply
system
Higher-level
controller
PLC
+24 V
Emergency
stop
Stop
Start
IN
OUT
LTP-B
main terminals
Emergency stop
checkback
1
24 V
2
1 = Enable
0 = Stop
7
0V
Reset
Safety relay
t1
12
STO+
13
STO -
27021606288091915
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
With single-channel disconnection, you have to make certain fault assumptions and
provide for corresponding fault exclusions. Observe chapter "Requirements on safety
relays" (→ 2 200).
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
205
11
Functional safety (STO)
Safety characteristics
11.4
Safety characteristics
Characteristic values
in accordance with:
EN 61800-5-2
EN ISO 13849-1
EN 62061
Classification/underlying standards
SIL 2
(Safety Integrity Level)
PL d (Performance Level)
SILCL 2
(PFHd value)1)
1.23 × 10-9 1/h
Service life / mission
time
20 years, then the components must be replaced with new components.
Proof test interval
20 years
-
Safe state
20 years
Safe Torque Off (STO)
STO, SS12) in accordance with EN 61800-5-2
Safety functions
1) Probability of dangerous failure per hour.
2) With suitable external control
11.5
Signal terminal block for STO safety contact
MOVITRAC® LTP‑B
Terminal
Safety contact
Function General electronics data
12
STO+
DC +24 V input, max. 100 mA, STO safety contact
13
STO-
Reference potential for DC +24 V input
Permissible cable cross
section
One core per terminal: 0.05 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 30 – 12).
Min.
Typical
Max.
DC 18 V
DC 24 V
DC 30 V
Time to inhibit output stage
-
-
1 ms
Time until Inhibit is shown on the display when STO is active
-
-
20 ms
Time until an STO switching time
error is detected and displayed
-
-
20 ms
Input voltage range
INFORMATION
22872051/EN – 09/2016
It is not possible to control the STO inputs via pulsed signals (for example, self-testing digital outputs of safety controllers).
206
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Declaration of conformity
12
12
Declaration of conformity
EU Declaration of Conformity
Translation of the original text
901790212/EN
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co. KG
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42, D-76646 Bruchsal
declares under sole responsibility that the following products
Frequency inverters of the product series
MOVITRAC® LTP-B
are in conformity with
Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC
(L 157, 09.06.2006, 24-86)
This includes the fulfillment of the protection targets for "electrical power supply" in accordance with annex I No. 1.5.1
according to the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC -- Note: 2014/35/EU is currently valid (as of 20 Apr 2016).
EMC Directive
2014/30/EU
(L 96, 29.03.2014, 79-106)
RoHS Directive
2011/65/EC
(L 174, 01.07.2011, 88-110)
Applied harmonized standards:
EN 61800-5-1:2007
EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012
EN 61800-5-2:2007
EN 50581:2012
4)
22872051/EN – 09/2016
4) According to the EMC Directive, the listed products are not independently operable products. EMC assessment is only possible
after these products have been integrated in an overall system. For the assessment, the product was installed in a typical plant
configuration.
Bruchsal
07.07.2016
Place
Date
Johann Soder
Managing Director Technology
a)
b)
a) b)
Authorized representative for issuing this declaration on behalf of the manufacturer
Authorized representative for compiling the technical documents
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
207
Index
Index
STO according to PL d (EN 13849-1) .......... 203
Numerical
3-wire control ....................................................... 82
87 Hz characteristic ............................................. 75
E
AC brakemotors, connection ............................... 33
Ambient conditions ............................................ 174
Ambient temperature ......................................... 174
Assembly
Safety notes ................................................... 12
Automatic measuring procedure ......................... 59
B
Braking resistor
Connection ..................................................... 31
C
Cable length, permitted ....................................... 95
Checking the disconnection device ................... 200
Communication socket RJ45............................... 47
Configuring the master inverter ........................... 68
Configuring the slave inverters ............................ 69
Conformity ......................................................... 173
Connection
Braking resistor .............................................. 31
Inverter and motor .......................................... 49
Safety notes ................................................... 13
Connection variants........................................... 202
Control cabinet, installation ................................. 21
Control word ........................................................ 94
Copyright notice .................................................... 9
D
Electrical connection ........................................... 13
Electrical installation ............................................ 23
Before installation........................................... 23
Electromagnetic compatibility .............................. 38
Interference emission ..................................... 38
Interference immunity..................................... 38
Operation on a TN system with RCD switch
(IP20).............................................................. 27
Electronics Service ............................................ 109
Embedded safety notes......................................... 8
EMC standards for interference emission ......... 173
Emergency code objects ................................... 108
Engineering software
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio .......................... 57
Error codes .......................................................... 87
Error history ......................................................... 86
Error reset............................................................ 85
Exclusion of liability ............................................... 9
Extended storage .............................................. 109
External safety controller ................................... 199
F
Factory setting, parameter reset ......................... 54
Fault clearance .................................................... 86
Fault diagnostics ................................................. 86
Fire mode/emergency mode ............................... 74
Functional safety technology
Safety note ..................................................... 12
Data source selection parameters..................... 167
Derating ............................................................... 13
Designated use ................................................... 11
G
Device structure .................................................. 15
Digital inputs function selection (P1-15) ............ 126
Dimensions
H
IP20 housing ................................................ 189
IP55/NEMA-12 housing................................ 190
Disconnection of a single device ....................... 203
SS1 according to PL d (EN 13849-1) ........... 204
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Group drive.......................................................... 33
Help card ............................................................. 27
Hoist function....................................................... 70
Housing
Dimensions................................................... 188
Housing variants................................................ 188
22872051/EN – 09/16
A
208
Drive status ......................................................... 83
Static .............................................................. 83
Index
I
Information
Designation in the documentation .................... 8
Input voltage ranges .......................................... 187
Installation ........................................................... 19
Electrical......................................................... 23
Inverter and motor connection........................ 49
Mechanical ..................................................... 21
Notes on routing control leads...................... 197
Requirements ............................................... 197
UL-compliant .................................................. 34
Installation with IP55/IP66 housing ..................... 22
IP20/NEMA-1 housing
Assembly........................................................ 21
Dimensions................................................... 189
IP55/IP66 installation........................................... 22
IP55/NEMA-12 housing
Dimensions................................................... 190
IT systems ........................................................... 26
K
Key combinations ................................................ 54
Keypad mode, startup ......................................... 66
L
Lifting applications ............................................... 11
Line contactors .................................................... 24
Logic source selection parameters.................... 166
LT Shell software................................................. 55
LTX encoder module ........................................... 27
M
Mains fuses ......................................................... 25
Master-slave mode .............................................. 68
Mechanical installation ........................................ 21
Motor connection ................................................. 33
Motor potentiometer ............................................ 81
Multi-motor drive / group drive............................. 33
22872051/EN – 09/16
O
Operating state .................................................... 84
Operation............................................................. 83
Drive status .................................................... 83
On the IT system ............................................ 26
Safety notes ................................................... 14
Operation at 87 Hz characteristic ........................ 75
Operation, requirements.................................... 200
Option card .......................................................... 27
Output power and current load .......................... 175
1-phase system AC 200 – 240 V.................. 175
3-phase system AC 200 – 240 V.................. 176
3-phase system AC 380 – 480 V.................. 180
3-phase system AC 500 – 600 V.................. 184
Overload capacity.............................................. 187
Overview of signal terminals ............................... 44
Main terminals ................................................ 44
Relay terminals............................................... 47
P
P04-07 Max. motor torque limit ......................... 148
P1-01 Maximum speed ..................................... 122
P1-02 Minimum speed ...................................... 122
P1-03 Acceleration ramp time ........................... 122
P1-04 Deceleration ramp time........................... 123
P1-05 Stop mode .............................................. 123
P1-06 Energy saving function ........................... 123
P1-07 Rated motor voltage ............................... 124
P1-08 Rated motor current ................................ 124
P1-09 Rated motor frequency ........................... 124
P1-10 Rated motor speed ................................. 124
P1-11 Voltage increase ..................................... 125
P1-12 Control signal source .............................. 125
P1-13 Error log .................................................. 126
P1-14 Extended parameter access ................... 126
P1-15 Digital inputs function selection .............. 126
P1-16 Motor type ............................................... 130
P1-17 Servo module function selection ............. 131
P1-18 Motor thermistor selection ...................... 131
P1-19 Inverter address ...................................... 131
P1-20 SBus baud rate ....................................... 131
P1-21 Stiffness .................................................. 131
P1-22 motor load inertia .................................... 131
P2-01 Fixed setpoint speed 1............................ 132
P2-01–P2-08 ..................................................... 132
P2-02 Fixed setpoint speed 2............................ 132
P2-03 Fixed setpoint speed 3............................ 132
P2-04 Fixed setpoint speed 4............................ 132
P2-05 Fixed setpoint speed 5............................ 132
P2-06 Fixed setpoint speed 6............................ 133
P2-07 Fixed setpoint speed 7............................ 133
P2-08 Fixed setpoint speed 8............................ 133
P2-09 Skip center frequency ............................. 133
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
209
Index
P2-28 Slave speed scaling ................................ 138
P2-28: 29 Master/slave parameter .................... 137
P2-29 Slave speed scaling factor ...................... 138
P2-30 Analog input 1 format.............................. 138
P2-30–P2-35 Analog inputs .............................. 138
P2-31 Analog input 1 scaling............................. 139
P2-32 Analog input 1 offset ............................... 139
P2-33 Analog input 2 format.............................. 140
P2-34 Analog input 2 scaling............................. 140
P2-35 Analog input 2 offset ............................... 140
P2-36 Start mode selection ............................... 140
P2-37 Keypad restart speed.............................. 141
P2-38 Mains loss stop control ........................... 142
P2-39 Parameter lock........................................ 142
P2-40 Extended parameter access code definition ..
142
P3-01 PID proportional gain .............................. 142
P3-02 PID integral time constant....................... 142
P3-03 PID differential time constant .................. 143
P3-04 PID operating mode ................................ 143
P3-05 PID reference selection .......................... 143
P3-06 PID Digital reference............................... 143
P3-07 PID controller upper limit ........................ 143
P3-08 PID controller lower limit ......................... 143
P3-09 PID output control ................................... 143
P3-10 PID feedback selection ........................... 144
P3-11 PID ramp activation error ........................ 144
P3-12 PID actual value display scaling factor ... 144
P3-13 PID feedback wake-up level ................... 144
P4-01 Control .................................................... 145
P4-02 Auto tune ................................................ 146
P4-03 Speed controller proportional gain .......... 146
P4-04 Speed controller integral time constant .. 146
P4-05 Motor power factor .................................. 146
P4-06 – P4-09 Motor torque settings ................ 147
P4-06 Torque reference source ........................ 146
P4-08 Min. torque limit ...................................... 149
P4-09 Max. regenerative torque limit ................ 149
P4-10 V/f characteristic adjustment frequency .. 150
P4-10/11 V/f characteristic settings ................... 149
P4-11 V/f characteristic curve adjustment voltage ...
150
P4-12 Motor brake control ................................. 150
P4-13 Release time of the motor brake............. 150
P4-14 Application time of the motor brake ........ 150
P4-15 Torque threshold for brake release......... 151
P4-16 Torque threshold timeout ........................ 151
P4-17 Thermal motor protection to UL508C ..... 151
P5-01 Inverter address ...................................... 151
P5-02 SBus baud rate ....................................... 151
P5-03 Modbus baud rate ................................... 152
P5-04 Modbus data format ................................ 152
P5-05 Response to communication failure........ 152
P5-06 Communication failure timeout ............... 152
P5-07 Ramp specified via SBus ........................ 152
P5-08 Synchronization duration ........................ 152
P5-09 – P5-11 fieldbus-PDOx definition............ 153
P5-09 Fieldbus PDO2 definition ........................ 153
P5-10 Fieldbus PDO3 definition ........................ 153
P5-11 Fieldbus PDO4 definition ........................ 153
P5-12 – P5-14 fieldbus-PDOx definition............ 153
P5-12 Fieldbus PDI2 definition .......................... 154
P5-13 Fieldbus PDI3 definition .......................... 154
P5-14 Fieldbus PDI4 definition .......................... 154
P5-15 Expansion relay 3 function...................... 154
P5-16 Relay 3 upper limit .................................. 154
P5-17 Relay 3 lower limit................................... 155
210
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/16
P2-10 Skip band ................................................ 133
P2-11 Analog output 1 function selection .......... 134
P2-11: P2-13 analog outputs............................. 133
P2-12 Analog output format .............................. 134
P2-13 Analog output 2 function selection .......... 134
P2-14 Analog output 2 format ........................... 134
P2-15 – P2-20 Relay outputs ............................ 135
P2-15 User relay output 1 function selection..... 135
P2-16 Upper limit of user relay 1: Analog output 1...
135
P2-17 Lower limit of user relay 1: Analog output......
135
P2-18 User relay output 2 function selection..... 136
P2-19 Upper limit of user relay 2: Analog output 2...
136
P2-20 Lower limit of user relay 2: Analog output......
136
P2-21 Display scaling factor .............................. 136
P2-21: 22 Display scaling .................................. 136
P2-22 Display scaling source ............................ 136
P2-23 Zero speed holding time ......................... 136
P2-24 Switching frequency, PWM ..................... 136
P2-25 Second deceleration ramp ...................... 137
P2-26 Flying start enable .................................. 137
P2-27 Standby mode......................................... 137
Index
P5-18 Expansion relay 4 function...................... 155
P5-19 Relay 4 upper limit .................................. 155
P5-20 Relay 4 lower limit................................... 155
P6-01 Firmware upgrade activation .................. 155
P6-02 Automatic thermal management ............. 155
P6-03 Auto-reset delay time .............................. 156
P6-04 User relay hysteresis band ..................... 156
P6-05 Encoder feedback enable ....................... 156
P6-06 PPR count............................................... 156
P6-07 Speed error trigger threshold .................. 156
P6-08 Max. frequency for speed setpoint.......... 156
P6-09 Droop speed/load distribution control ..... 157
P6-10 Reserved ................................................ 157
P6-11 Speed holding time on enable ................ 157
P7-16 Motor nameplate speed .......................... 164
P8-01 Simulated encoder scaling...................... 164
P8-02 Input pulse scaling value ........................ 164
P8-03 Lag error low ........................................... 165
P8-04 Lag error high ......................................... 165
P8-05 Reference travel ..................................... 165
P8-06 Position controller proportional gain ....... 165
P8-07 Touch probe trigger mode ...................... 165
P8-08 Reserved ................................................ 165
P8-09 Velocity precontrol gain .......................... 165
P8-10 Acceleration feedforward gain ................ 166
P8-11 Low-word reference offset ...................... 166
P8-12 High word reference offset...................... 166
P8-13 Reserved ................................................ 166
P6-12 Speed holding time on inhibit (fixed setpoint
speed 8) ....................................................... 157
P8-14 Reference enable torque ........................ 166
P9-01 Enable input source ................................ 168
P9-02 Rapid stop input source .......................... 168
P9-03 Input source for clockwise rotation (CW) 168
P9-04 Input source for counterclockwise rotation
(CCW) .......................................................... 168
P9-05 Latch function enable.............................. 168
P9-06 Reverse enable....................................... 168
P9-07 Reset input source .................................. 168
P9-08 External fault input source ...................... 169
P9-09 Source for terminal control override........ 169
P9-10 – P9-17 Speed source ............................ 169
P9-10 Speed source 1....................................... 169
P6-13 Fire mode logic ....................................... 158
P6-14 Fire mode speed ..................................... 158
P6-15 Analog output 1 scaling .......................... 158
P6-16 Analog output 1 offset ............................. 158
P6-17 Max. torque limit timeout......................... 159
P6-18 DC braking voltage level ......................... 159
P6-19 Braking resistor value ............................. 159
P6-20 Braking resistor power ............................ 159
P6-21 Brake chopper operating cycle at undertemperature ........................................................ 160
P6-22 Reset fan runtime ................................... 160
P6-23 Reset kWh counter ................................. 160
P6-24 Parameter factory settings ...................... 160
P6-25 Access code level ................................... 160
P7-01 Motor stator resistance (Rs) ................... 161
P7-02 Motor rotor resistance (Rr)...................... 161
P7-03 Motor stator inductance (Lsd) ................. 161
P7-04 Motor magnetizing current (Id rms)......... 162
P7-05 Motor leakage loss coefficient (sigma) ... 162
P7-06 Motor stator inductance (Lsq) − only for synchronous motors........................................... 162
22872051/EN – 09/16
P7-07 Enhanced generator control ................... 162
P7-08 Parameter adjustment ............................ 162
P7-09 Overvoltage current limit ......................... 162
P7-10 Motor load inertia/stiffness ...................... 163
P7-11 Pulse width min. limit .............................. 163
P7-12 Premagnetization time ............................ 163
P7-13 D-gain vector speed controller ................ 163
P7-14 Low-frequency torque boost ................... 163
P7-15 Torque boost frequency limit .................. 164
P9-11 Speed source 2....................................... 169
P9-12 Speed source 3....................................... 169
P9-14 Speed source 5....................................... 169
P9-15 Speed source 6....................................... 169
P9-16 Speed source 7....................................... 170
P9-17 Speed source 8....................................... 170
P9-18 – P9-20 Input speed selection ................ 170
P9-18 Input speed selection 0 ........................... 170
P9-19 Input speed selection 1 ........................... 170
P9-20 Input speed selection 2 ........................... 170
P9-21 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 0.... 171
P9-21–P9-23 Fixed speed selection input......... 170
P9-22 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 1.... 171
P9-23 Fixed setpoint speed selection input 2.... 171
P9-24 Positive jog mode input........................... 171
P9-25 Negative jog mode input ......................... 171
P9-26 Reference travel enable input ................. 171
P9-27 Reference cam input............................... 171
P9-28 Motor potentiometer up input source ...... 171
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
211
Index
P9-29 Motor potentiometer down input source . 172
P9-30 Positive limit switch CW .......................... 172
P9-31 Negative limit switch CCW...................... 172
P9-32 Rapid deceleration ramp enable ............. 172
P9-33 Fire mode input selection........................ 172
P9-34 PID fixed setpoint reference selection input 0
172
P9-35 PID fixed setpoint reference selection input 1
172
Operation...................................................... 200
Startup.......................................................... 200
Residual current device ....................................... 25
Restrictions to application ................................... 13
Rights to claim under limited warranty .................. 9
RJ45 communication socket ............................... 47
Parameter.......................................................... 111
Parameter group 1
Basic parameters (level 1)............................ 122
Parameter group 2
Extended parameter setting (level 2) ........... 132
Parameter group 3
Safe state .......................................................... 193
Safe Torque Off (STO) ...................................... 195
Safety concept................................................... 193
PID controller (level 2).................................. 142
Parameter group 4
Motor control (level 2)................................... 145
Parameter group 5
Fieldbus communication (level 2)................. 151
Parameter group 6
Extended parameters (level 3) ..................... 155
Parameter group 7
Motor control parameters (level 3) ............... 161
Parameter group 8
Application-specific (only applicable to LTX)
parameters (level 3) ..................................... 164
Parameter group 9
Safety functions ................................................... 12
Safety notes
Assembly........................................................ 12
Designation in the documentation .................... 8
Installation ...................................................... 12
Preliminary information................................... 10
Real time monitoring .................................... 111
Parameters for realtime monitoring ................... 111
PID controller mode, startup................................ 66
Process data ....................................................... 94
Product names ...................................................... 9
Protection function............................................. 192
Protective separation........................................... 14
R
RCD..................................................................... 25
Removing the terminal cover............................... 28
Repair ................................................................ 109
Requirements
External safety controller.............................. 199
Installation .................................................... 197
212
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Safe disconnection function .............................. 193
Limitations .................................................... 196
Safety controller, external
Requirements ............................................... 199
Structure of embedded..................................... 8
Structure of the section-related ........................ 8
Safety relays, requirements............................... 200
Safety technology
Safe state ..................................................... 193
Safety-related conditions ................................... 197
Section-related safety notes .................................. 8
Separation, protective ......................................... 14
Service .............................................................. 109
Error codes..................................................... 87
Error history.................................................... 86
Fault diagnostics ............................................ 86
Servo-specific parameters (level 1) ................... 130
Signal words in safety notes.................................. 8
Slip compensation ....................................... 60, 124
SS1 according to PL d (EN 13849-1) ................ 204
Startup ........................................................... 52, 59
Keypad mode ................................................. 66
PID controller mode........................................ 66
Safety notes ................................................... 14
Startup............................................................ 59
Terminal mode (factory setting)...................... 65
Startup, requirements ........................................ 200
Status word ......................................................... 94
Status, drive ........................................................ 83
22872051/EN – 09/16
Digital inputs defined by the user (level 3) ... 166
Parameters
Digital inputs function selection (P1-15) ....... 126
S
Index
STO (Safe Torque Off) ...................................... 195
STO according to PL d (EN 13849-1) ............... 203
Structure of process data words.......................... 92
Switching capacity of the safety relay ............... 200
T
Target group ........................................................ 10
Technical data ................................................... 173
Terminal mode, startup ....................................... 65
Thermal motor protection TF, TH, KTY84, PT1000 .
32
UL-compliant installation ..................................... 34
Use ...................................................................... 11
User interface ...................................................... 52
Keypad ........................................................... 52
V
Validating the safety functions........................... 200
Validation........................................................... 200
Voltage ranges .................................................. 187
W
Wiring diagram
Braking resistor .............................................. 51
22872051/EN – 09/16
Trademarks ........................................................... 9
Transport ............................................................. 12
Type designation ................................................. 15
U
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
213
13
Address list
13
Address list
Algeria
Sales
Algiers
REDUCOM Sarl
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune
Bellevue
16200 El Harrach Alger
Tel. +213 21 8214-91
Fax +213 21 8222-84
http://www.reducom-dz.com
info@reducom-dz.com
Buenos Aires
SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A.
Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín
Prov. de Buenos Aires
Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Fax +54 3327 4572-21
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.
27 Beverage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Fax +61 3 9933-1003
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park
New South Wales, 2164
Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
Fax +61 2 9725-9905
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Vienna
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Straße 24
1230 Wien
Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Bangladesh
SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road
salesdhaka@seweurodrivebangladesh.com
East Rampura
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Minsk
Foreign unitary production enterprise SEWEURODRIVE
RybalkoStr. 26
220033 Minsk
Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
Fax +375 17 298 47 54
http://www.sew.by
sales@sew.by
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brussels
SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a.
Researchpark Haasrode 1060
Evenementenlaan 7
3001 Leuven
Tel. +32 16 386-311
Fax +32 16 386-336
http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
info@sew-eurodrive.be
Service Competence
Center
Industrial
Gears
SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a.
Rue de Parc Industriel, 31
6900 Marche-en-Famenne
Tel. +32 84 219-878
Fax +32 84 219-879
http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-IG@sew-eurodrive.be
Production
Sales
Service
São Paulo
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.
Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia sew@sew.com.br
Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly
Sales
Service
Rio Claro
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.
Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172
Condomínio Industrial Conpark
Caixa Postal: 327
13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Fax +55 19 3524-6653
montadora.rc@sew.com.br
Joinville
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba
89239-270 – Joinville / SC
Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Fax +55 47 3027-6888
filial.sc@sew.com.br
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GmbH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
1606 Sofia
Tel. +359 2 9151160
Fax +359 2 9151166
bever@bever.bg
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bangladesh
Sales
Belarus
Sales
Belgium
Bulgaria
Sales
214
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Brazil
Address list
13
Cameroon
Sales
Douala
SEW-EURODRIVE S.A.R.L.
Ancienne Route Bonabéri
P.O. Box
B.P 8674
Douala-Cameroun
Tel. +237 233 39 02 10
Fax +237 233 39 02 10
info@sew-eurodrive-cm
Toronto
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.
210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1
Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Fax +1 905 791-2999
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.
Tilbury Industrial Park
7188 Honeyman Street
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Fax +1 604 946-2513
b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.
2555 Rue Leger
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9
Tel. +1 514 367-1124
Fax +1 514 367-3677
a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA
Las Encinas 1295
Parque Industrial Valle Grande
LAMPA
Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Fax +56 2 2757 7001
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.
No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. +86 22 25322612
Fax +86 22 25323273
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly
Sales
Service
Suzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.
333, Suhong Middle Road
Suzhou Industrial Park
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Tel. +86 512 62581781
Fax +86 512 62581783
suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd.
No. 9, JunDa Road
East Section of GETDD
Guangzhou 510530
Tel. +86 20 82267890
Fax +86 20 82267922
guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Shenyang
SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd.
10A-2, 6th Road
Shenyang Economic Technological Development Area
Shenyang, 110141
Tel. +86 24 25382538
Fax +86 24 25382580
shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
Taiyuan
SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd.
No.3, HuaZhang Street,
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Tel. +86-351-7117520
Fax +86-351-7117522
taiyuan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Wuhan
SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd.
10A-2, 6th Road
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA
430056 Wuhan
Tel. +86 27 84478388
Fax +86 27 84478389
wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Xi'An
SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd.
Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road
Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chile
Assembly
Sales
Service
22872051/EN – 09/2016
China
Sales
Service
Tel. +852 36902200
Fax +852 36902211
contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
215
13
Address list
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bogota
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.
Calle 17 No. 132-18
Interior 2 Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santafé de Bogotá
Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Fax +57 1 54750-44
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
sew@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
Zeleni dol 10
10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Fax +385 1 4613-158
kompeks@inet.hr
Hostivice
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o.
Floriánova 2459
253 01 Hostivice
Tel. +420 255 709 601
Fax +420 235 350 613
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Drive Service
Hotline / 24
Hour Service
+420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW)
Service
Tel. +420 255 709 632
Fax +420 235 358 218
servis@sew-eurodrive.cz
Copenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30
2670 Greve
Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Fax +45 43 9585-09
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
Building 10, Block 13005, First Industrial Zone,
Obour City Cairo
Tel. +202 44812673 / 79 (7 lines)
Fax +202 44812685
http://www.copam-egypt.com
copam@copam-egypt.com
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Reti tee 4
75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa
Tel. +372 6593230
Fax +372 6593231
http://www.alas-kuul.ee
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hollola
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimäentie 4
15860 Hollola
Tel. +358 201 589-300
Fax +358 3 780-6211
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Service
Hollola
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Keskikankaantie 21
15860 Hollola
Tel. +358 201 589-300
Fax +358 3 780-6211
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production
Assembly
Karkkila
SEW Industrial Gears Oy
Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8
03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila
Tel. +358 201 589-300
Fax +358 201 589-310
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production
Sales
Service
Hagenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54 route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 20185
67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Production
Forbach
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Brumath
SEW-USOCOME
1 Rue de Bruxelles
67670 Mommenheim Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 00
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'activités de Magellan
62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Assembly
Sales
Service
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Egypt
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Assembly
Sales
Service
216
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
France
Address list
13
France
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
75 rue Antoine Condorcet
38090 Vaulx-Milieu
Tel. +33 4 74 99 60 00
Fax +33 4 74 99 60 15
Nantes
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d’activités de la forêt
4 rue des Fontenelles
44140 Le Bignon
Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2 rue Denis Papin
77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
Libreville
SEW-EURODRIVE SARL
183, Rue 5.033.C, Lalala à droite
P.O. Box 15682
Libreville
Tel. +241 03 28 81 55
+241 06 54 81 33
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cm
sew@sew-eurodrive.cm
Bruchsal
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42
76646 Bruchsal
P.O. Box
Postfach 3023 – D-76642 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Production / Industrial Bruchsal
Gears
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Christian-Pähr-Str. 10
76646 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-2970
Production
Graben
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1
76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251-2970
Östringen
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk
Östringen
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2
76684 Östringen
Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Fax +49 7253 9254-90
oestringen@sew-eurodrive.de
Mechanics /
Mechatronics
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1
76676 Graben-Neudorf
Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Fax +49 7251 75-1711
scc-mechanik@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42
76646 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Fax +49 7251 75-1769
scc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
North
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42
30823 Garbsen (Hannover)
Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Fax +49 5137 8798-55
dtc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Dänkritzer Weg 1
08393 Meerane (Zwickau)
Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Fax +49 3764 7606-30
dtc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Domagkstraße 5
85551 Kirchheim (München)
Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Fax +49 89 909552-50
dtc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Siemensstraße 1
40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf)
Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Fax +49 2173 8507-55
dtc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Berlin
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44
12526 Berlin
Tel. +49 306331131-30
Fax +49 306331131-36
dc-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Gabon
Sales
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Service Competence
Center
Drive Technology
Center
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Drive Center
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
c/o BASF SE
Gebäude W130 Raum 101
67056 Ludwigshafen
Tel. +49 7251 75 3759
Fax +49 7251 75 503759
dc-ludwigshafen@sew-eurodrive.de
Saarland
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4
66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler
Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Fax +49 6831 48946 13
dc-saarland@sew-eurodrive.de
Ulm
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Dieselstraße 18
89160 Dornstadt
Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Fax +49 7348 9885-90
dc-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
217
13
Address list
Germany
Würzburg
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
Nürnbergerstraße 118
97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service
Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Fax +49 931 27886-66
dc-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
0 800 SEWHELP
0 800 7394357
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
DeVilliers Way
Trident Park
Normanton
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Fax +44 1924 893-702
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service
Tel. 01924 896911
Athens
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.
12, K. Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136
18545 Piraeus
Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
http://www.boznos.gr
info@boznos.gr
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
Csillaghegyí út 13.
1037 Budapest
Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Fax +36 1 437 06-50
http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Reykjavik
Varma & Vélaverk ehf.
Knarrarvogi 4
104 Reykjavík
Tel. +354 585 1070
Fax +354 585)1071
http://www.varmaverk.is
vov@vov.is
Registered Office
Assembly
Sales
Service
Vadodara
SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited
Plot No. 4, GIDC
POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. +91 265 3045200
Fax +91 265 3045300
http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chennai
SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited
Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II
Mambakkam Village
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Tel. +91 44 37188888
Fax +91 44 37188811
saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Pune
SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited
Plant: Plot No. D236/1,
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II,
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Tel. +91 21 35 628700
Fax +91 21 35 628715
salespune@seweurodriveindia.com
Medan
PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan
II
Medan 20252
Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +62
61 30008041
sil@serumpunindah.com
serumpunindah@yahoo.com
http://www.serumpunindah.com
Jakarta
PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99,
Sunter
Jakarta 14350
Tel. +62 21 65310599
Fax +62 21 65310600
csajkt@cbn.net.id
Jakarta
PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra Industri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III,
Blok E No. 27
Jakarta 14470
Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
Fax +62 21 2921-8988
aplindo@indosat.net.id
http://www.aplindo.com
Greece
Sales
Hungary
Sales
Service
Iceland
Sales
India
218
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Indonesia
Sales
Address list
13
Indonesia
Surabaya
PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI
Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai
G6 No. 11
Surabaya 60111
Tel. +62 31 5990128
Fax +62 31 5962666
sales@triagri.co.id
http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya
CV. Multi Mas
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18
Surabaya 60174
Tel. +62 31 5458589
Fax +62 31 5317220
sianhwa@sby.centrin.net.id
http://www.cvmultimas.com
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.
48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Fax +353 1 830-6458
http://www.alperton.ie
info@alperton.ie
Tel Aviv
Liraz Handasa Ltd.
Ahofer Str 34B / 228
58858 Holon
Tel. +972 3 5599511
Fax +972 3 5599512
http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Milan
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.
Via Bernini,14
20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. +39 02 96 980229
Fax +39 02 96 980 999
http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
milano@sew-eurodrive.it
Abidjan
SEW-EURODRIVE SARL
Ivory Coast
Rue des Pêcheurs, Zone 3
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26
Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Fax +225 21 25 30 47
info@sew-eurodrive.ci
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Iwata
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD
250-1, Shimoman-no,
Iwata
Shizuoka 438-0818
Tel. +81 538 373811
Fax +81 538 373814
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
hamamatsu@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Almaty
SEW-EURODRIVE LLP
291-291A, Tole bi street
050031, Almaty
Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Tashkent
SEW-EURODRIVE LLP
Representative office in Uzbekistan
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street,
Tashkent, 100084
Tel. +998 71 2359411
Fax +998 71 2359412
http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Ulaanbaatar
IM Trading LLC
Narny zam street 62
Sukhbaatar district,
Ulaanbaatar 14230
Tel. +976-77109997
Fax +976-77109997
imt@imt.mn
Nairobi
SEW-EURODRIVE Pty Ltd
Transnational Plaza, 5th Floor
Mama Ngina Street
P.O. Box 8998-00100
Nairobi
Tel. +254 791 398840
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
info@sew.co.tz
Riga
SIA Alas-Kuul
Katlakalna 11C
1073 Riga
Tel. +371 6 7139253
Fax +371 6 7139386
http://www.alas-kuul.lv
info@alas-kuul.com
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Sales
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ivory Coast
Sales
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Kazakhstan
Sales
Kenya
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Sales
Latvia
Sales
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
219
13
Address list
Lebanon
Sales (Lebanon)
Beirut
Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl
B. P. 80484
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut
Tel. +961 1 510 532
Fax +961 1 494 971
ssacar@inco.com.lb
Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore)
Sin El Fil.
B. P. 55-378
Beirut
Tel. +961 1 494 786
Fax +961 1 494 971
http://www.medrives.com
info@medrives.com
Alytus
UAB Irseva
Statybininku 106C
63431 Alytus
Tel. +370 315 79204
Fax +370 315 56175
http://www.irseva.lt
irmantas@irseva.lt
Skopje
Boznos DOOEL
Dime Anicin 2A/7A
1000 Skopje
Tel. +389 23256553
Fax +389 23256554
http://www.boznos.mk
Johor
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD
No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. +60 7 3549409
Fax +60 7 3541404
sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
Assembly
Sales
Service
Quéretaro
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V.
SEM-981118-M93
Tequisquiapan No. 102
Parque Industrial Quéretaro
C.P. 76220
Querétaro, México
Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Fax +52 442 1030-301
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Sales
Service
Puebla
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V.
Calzada Zavaleta No. 3922 Piso 2 Local 6
Col. Santa Cruz Buenavista
C.P. 72154
Puebla, México
Tel. +52 (222) 221 248
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Ulaanbaatar
IM Trading LLC
Narny zam street 62
Union building, Suite A-403-1
Sukhbaatar district,
Ulaanbaatar 14230
Tel. +976-77109997
Tel. +976-99070395
Fax +976-77109997
http://imt.mn/
imt@imt.mn
Bouskoura
SEW-EURODRIVE Morocco
Parc Industriel CFCIM, Lot 55 and 59
Bouskoura
Tel. +212 522 88 85 00
Fax +212 522 88 84 50
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
sew@sew-eurodrive.ma
Swakopmund
DB Mining & Industrial Services
Einstein Street
Strauss Industrial Park
Unit1
Swakopmund
Tel. +264 64 462 738
Fax +264 64 462 734
anton@dbminingnam.com
Rotterdam
SEW-EURODRIVE B.V.
Industrieweg 175
3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 10 4463-700
Fax +31 10 4155-552
Service: 0800-SEWHELP
http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
info@sew-eurodrive.nl
Sales (Jordan, Kuwait , Beirut
Saudi Arabia, Syria)
Lithuania
Sales
Luxembourg
representation: Belgium
Macedonia
Sales
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Mexiko
Mongolia
Technical Office
Morocco
Sales
Service
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
220
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Namibia
Sales
Address list
13
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Auckland
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.
P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. +64 9 2745627
Fax +64 9 2740165
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram
Christchurch
Tel. +64 3 384-6251
Fax +64 3 384-6455
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Lagos
Greenpeg Nig. Ltd
Plot 296A, Adeyemo Akapo Str. Omole GRA
Ikeja Lagos-Nigeria
Tel. +234-701-821-9200-1
http://www.greenpegltd.com
bolaji.adekunle@greenpegltd.com
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
1599 Moss
Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Fax +47 69 24 10 40
http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
Industrial Power Drives
Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area,
seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Nigeria
Sales
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Sales
Paraguay
Sales
Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L
Mora
De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción
Departamento Central
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Tel. +595 991 519695
Fax +595 21 3285539
sewpy@sew-eurodrive.com.py
Lima
SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C.
Los Calderos, 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. +51 1 3495280
Fax +51 1 3493002
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Makati
P.T. Cerna Corporation
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz
Makati City 1205
Tel. +63 2 519 6214
Fax +63 2 890 2802
mech_drive_sys@ptcerna.com
http://www.ptcerna.com
Łódź
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.
ul. Techniczna 5
92-518 Łódź
Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Fax +48 42 293 00 49
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Service
Tel. +48 42 293 0030
Fax +48 42 293 0043
24 Hour Service
Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86
3050-379 Mealhada
Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Fax +351 231 20 3685
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucharest
Sialco Trading SRL
str. Brazilia nr. 36
011783 Bucuresti
Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Fax +40 21 230-7170
sialco@sialco.ro
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Philippines
Sales
Poland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Portugal
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Assembly
Sales
Service
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Assembly
Sales
Service
St. Petersburg ЗАО «СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙФ»
а. я. 36
195220 Санкт-Петербург
Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Fax +7 812 3332523
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
221
13
Address list
Sambia
representation: South Africa
Senegal
Sales
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mécanique Générale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Tel. +221 338 494 770
Fax +221 338 494 771
http://www.senemeca.com
senemeca@senemeca.sn
Belgrade
DIPAR d.o.o.
Ustanicka 128a
PC Košum, IV floor
11000 Beograd
Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393
Fax +381 11 347 1337
office@dipar.rs
Singapore
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.
No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. +65 68621701
Fax +65 68612827
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Bratislava
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rybničná 40
831 06 Bratislava
Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Fax +421 2 33595 200
http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Slovenská ulica 26
040 01 Košice
Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Fax +421 55 671 2254
Mobile +421 907 671 976
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Celje
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.
UI. XIV. divizije 14
3000 Celje
Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Fax +386 3 490 83-21
pakman@siol.net
Serbia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovakia
Sales
Slovenia
Sales
Service
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED
Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Fax +27 11 248-7289
http://www.sew.co.za
info@sew.co.za
Cape Town
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED
Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Fax +27 21 552-9830
Telex 576 062
bgriffiths@sew.co.za
Durban
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road
Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo
cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent
Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia
robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
Ansan
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.
7, Dangjaengi-ro,
Danwon-gu,
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839
South Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
222
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Fax +82 31 492-8056
http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
22872051/EN – 09/2016
South Africa
Address list
13
South Korea
Busan
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil,
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Tel. +82 51 832-0204
Fax +82 51 832-0230
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L.
Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302
48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Fax +34 94 43184-71
http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Colombo
SM International (Pte) Ltd
254, Galle Raod
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Tel. +94 1 2584887
Fax +94 1 2582981
Manzini
C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd
PO Box 2960
Manzini M200
Tel. +268 2 518 6343
Fax +268 2 518 5033
engineering@cgtrading.co.sz
Jönköping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvägen 6-8
553 03 Jönköping
Box 3100 S-550 03 Jönköping
Tel. +46 36 34 42 00
Fax +46 36 34 42 80
http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
jonkoping@sew.se
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.
Jurastrasse 10
4142 Münchenstein bei Basel
Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Fax +41 61 417 1700
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Taipei
Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2
Tung Huw S. Road
Taipei
Tel. +886 2 27383535
Fax +886 2 27368268
Telex 27 245
sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou
Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road
Industrial District
Nan Tou 540
Tel. +886 49 255353
Fax +886 49 257878
sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Daressalam
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA
Plot 52, Regent Estate
PO Box 106274
Dar Es Salaam
Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
info@sew.co.tz
Chonburi
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.
700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh
Muang
Chonburi 20000
Tel. +66 38 454281
Fax +66 38 454288
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Tunis
T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2
Lot No. 39
2082 Fouchana
Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Fax +216 79 40 88 66
http://www.tms.com.tn
tms@tms.com.tn
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sri Lanka
Sales
Swaziland
Sales
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Taiwan
Sales
Tanzania
Sales
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tunisia
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Sales
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket
Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti
Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401
41480 Gebze Kocaeli
Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Fax +90 262 9991009
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
223
13
Address list
Ukraine
Assembly
Sales
Service
Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв»
ул. Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409
49008 Днепропетровск
Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Fax +380 56 372 2078
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
Montevideo
SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A.
Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe
CP 12000 Montevideo
Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Fax +598 2 21181-90
sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Southeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Northeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Fax +1 856 845-3179
csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Midwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. +1 937 335-0036
Fax +1 937 332-0038
cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Fax +1 214 330-4724
csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, CA 94544
Tel. +1 510 487-3560
Fax +1 510 487-6433
cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Wellford
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
148/150 Finch Rd.
Wellford, S.C. 29385
IGLogistics@seweurodrive.com
Uruguay
Assembly
Sales
USA
Additional addresses for service provided on request!
Uzbekistan
Technical Office
Tashkent
SEW-EURODRIVE LLP
Representative office in Uzbekistan
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street,
Tashkent, 100084
Tel. +998 71 2359411
Fax +998 71 2359412
http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Ho Chi Minh
City
Nam Trung Co., Ltd
Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town,
Binh Duong Province
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City
Tel. +84 8 8301026
Fax +84 8 8392223
khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
http://www.namtrung.com.vn
Hanoi
MICO LTD
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except
Construction Materials
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam
Tel. +84 4 39386666
Fax +84 4 3938 6888
nam_ph@micogroup.com.vn
http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Vietnam
22872051/EN – 09/2016
Sales
224
Operating Instructions – MOVITRAC® LTP-B
SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG
P.O. Box 3023
76642 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising